Add Esperanto, Turkish and Brazilian Portuguese translations

103 files changed, 16258 insertions, 1 deletions

diff --git a/docs/installer/eo.po b/docs/installer/eo.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2be8b1c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo.po
@@ -0,0 +1,3159 @@
+# Esperanto translation of Mageia Installer Help
+# Copyright (C) 2013 Mageia Documentation Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the MAgeia Installer package.
+# Pablo Foche <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, 2012, 2013.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
+"Language-Team: Esperanto <i18n-discuss@ml.mageia.org>\n"
+"Language: eo\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32
+msgid "License and Release Notes"
+msgstr "Licenco kaj publikig-notoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" width="
+"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45
+msgid "License Agreement"
+msgstr "Licenco"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
+"terms and conditions carefully."
+msgstr ""
+"Antaŭ ol instali <application>Magejon</application>, bv. legi la licencon "
+"zorgeme."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
+"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tiuj kondiĉoj aplikiĝas al la tuta distribuaĵo <application>Magejo</"
+"application> kaj devas esti akceptataj antaŭ ol daŭrigi la instaladon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"Por akcepti nur selektu <guilabel>Akceptu</guilabel> kaj klaku sur "
+"<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
+"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi decidas ne akcepti tiujn kondiĉojn, tiam ni dankas vin pro via "
+"rigardo. Klakante sur <guibutton>Ĉesu</guibutton> vi reŝarĝos vian "
+"komputilon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68
+msgid "Release Notes"
+msgstr "Publikig-notoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"Por vidi kio estas nova en ĉi tiu versio de <application>Magejo</"
+"application>, klaku sur la butono <guibutton>Publikig-notoj (Release Notes)  "
+"</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:4
+msgid "User and Superuser Management"
+msgstr "Uzula kaj superuzula administrado"
+
+#.  Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+#.        changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+#.        about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+#.        disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+#.        screen), marja, 20120409
+#.  barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+#.        "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? 
+#.  JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2013-04-26 added new note 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/addUser.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:34
+msgid "Set Administrator (root)  Password:"
+msgstr "Kreo de mastrumanta pasvorto (Set administrator (root) password):"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
+"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
+"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
+"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
+"the first password by comparing them."
+msgstr ""
+"Estas konsilinde por ĉiuj instaloj de <application>Magejo</application> krei "
+"superuzulan pasvorton, kutime nomita la <emphasis>mastrumanta (root) "
+"pasvorto</emphasis> en Linukso. Kiam vi tajpos pasvorton en la supra skatolo "
+"ĝia koloro ŝanĝiĝos el ruĝa al flava kaj verda dependante de la forto de la "
+"pasvorto. Verda kampo signifas ke vi estas uzanta fortan pasvorton. Vi devas "
+"retajpi la saman pasvorton en la plisuba skatolo, tio certigos ke vi ne "
+"mistajpis la unuan pasvorton dank'al komparo inter ambaŭ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+msgstr ""
+"En ĉiuj pasvortoj diferenciĝas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj, estas pli bone "
+"utiligi miksaĵon de literoj (majusklaj kaj minusklaj), nombroj kaj aliaj "
+"karaktroj en pasvorto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:56
+msgid "Enter a user"
+msgstr "Enigo de uzulo (Enter a user)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but "
+"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and "
+"anything else the average user does with his computer"
+msgstr ""
+"Aldonu uzulon ĉi tie. Uzulo havas malpli da rajtoj ol la superuzulo (root), "
+"sed sufiĉajn por retumi, utiligi oficej-programojn aŭ ludi komputil-ludojn "
+"kaj por io ajn kion la averaĝa uzulo faras perkomputile"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the "
+"users icon."
+msgstr ""
+"<guibutton>Piktogramo</guibutton>: se vi klakas sur ĉi tiu butono vi ŝanĝos "
+"la uzulan ikonon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
+"box."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Vera nomo</guilabel>: Metu la uzulan realan nomon en ĉi tiu teksta "
+"skatolo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
+"sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Saluta nomo (login name)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie eniru la uzulan "
+"salutan nomon aŭ lasu ke drakx-o utiligu version de la uzula vera nomo. "
+"<emphasis>La saluta nomo diferencigas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj.</"
+"emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
+"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
+"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Pasvorto</guilabel>: En ĉi tiu teksta skatolo vi devus tajpi la "
+"uzulan pasvorton. Estas kampo je la fino de la teksto-skatolo indikanta la "
+"forton de la pasvorto. (Vidu ankaŭ <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
+"password text boxes."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Pasvorto (denove)</guilabel>: Retajpu la uzulan pasvorton en ĉi "
+"tiu teksta skatolo kaj darkx kontrolos ĉu la pasvorto estas la sama en ĉiuj "
+"uzulaj pasvortaj teksto-skatoloj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+msgstr ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+msgstr ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:109
+msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+msgstr "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:116
+msgid "Advanced User Management"
+msgstr "Sperta uzulo-administrado"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a "
+"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. "
+"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account."
+msgstr ""
+"Se la <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> butono estas klakita aperos ekrano "
+"ebliganta eldoni la konfiguron de la aldonata uzulo.  Krome, vi povas "
+"aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account "
+"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest "
+"should save his important files to a USB key."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉio konservita de gasto uzanta defaŭltan <emphasis>rbash-an</emphasis> "
+"gastan konton en la dosierujo /home estos forigita post la elsaluto.  La "
+"gasto devus konservi gravajn dosierojn en USB-ŝlosilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a "
+"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, "
+"but he has more restricted access than normal users."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Aktivigi gastan konton (Enable guest account)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie "
+"vi povas aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton. Gasta konto ebligos gaston "
+"ensaluti kaj uzi la komputilon, sed ĝi havas pli da limigoj ol tiu de "
+"normalaj uzuloj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the "
+"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are "
+"Bash, Dash and Sh"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Ŝelo</guilabel>: Ĉi tio vidigos liston ebligantan ŝanĝi la \"shell"
+"\"-on uzatan de la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. Oni povas elekti Bash-"
+"on, Dash-on kaj Sh-on"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:144
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you "
+"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless "
+"you know what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Uzula ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tie vi povas starigi uzulan identigilon "
+"por la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. La identigilo estas nombro.  Lasu "
+"ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a "
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
+"what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Grupa ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tio ebligas vin starigi grupan "
+"identigilon.  Ankaŭ temas pri nombro, kutime la sama kiel tiu de la uzulo. "
+"Lasu ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11
+msgid "Choose the mount points"
+msgstr "Elekti surmetingojn"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 
+#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) 
+#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes 
+#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
+#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) 
+#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id="
+"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
+"can change the mount points."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi vidas la linuksajn subdiskojn kiuj estis trovitaj en via "
+"komputilo. Se vi ne akordas kun la sugestoj de <application>DrakX</"
+"application> vi povas ŝanĝi la surmetingojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
+"(root) partition."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi ŝanĝas ion, certiĝu pri tio ke vi daŭre havas <literal>/</literal> "
+"(radikan) subdiskon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\", \"Type\")."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉiu subdisko estas montrita tiel: \"Aparato\" (\"Kapablo\", \"Surmetingo\", "
+"\"Speco\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+msgstr ""
+"\"Aparato\", konsistas el: \"fiksita disko\", [\"fiksita diska litero\"], "
+"\"subdiska nombro\" (ekzemple, \"sda5\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
+"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
+"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
+"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas multajn subdiskojn, vi povas elekti multajn malsamajn "
+"surmetingojn per la faldebla menuo, kiel <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/"
+"home</literal> kaj <literal>/var</literal>. Vi povas ankaŭ fari viajn "
+"proprajn surmetingojn kiel <literal>/video</literal> por subdisko kie vi "
+"volas konservi viajn filmojn, aŭ <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> por la "
+"<literal>/home</literal> subdisko de kaldrona instalo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount "
+"point field blank."
+msgstr ""
+"En kazoj de subdiskoj al kiuj vi ne volas aliri vi povas lasi la surmetingan "
+"kampon malplena."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, "
+"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen "
+"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+msgstr ""
+"Klaku sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> se vi ne scias kion elekti, kaj tiam "
+"aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi subdiskon</guilabel>. En la aperonta ekrano, vi "
+"povas klaki sur konkreta subdisko por vidi ĝian specon kaj grandon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
+"DrakX suggests, or more."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi certas pri tio ke la surmetingoj estas ĝustaj, klaku sur "
+"<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>, kaj elektu ĉu vi nur volas strukturi la "
+"subdisko(j)n kiu(j)n sugestas DrakX aŭ pli da ili."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:18
+msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+msgstr "DrakX, la instalilo de Magejo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi estas nova aŭ nesperta uzulo de GNU/Linukso, la instalilo de Magejo "
+"estas desegnita por igi vian instaladon aŭ ĝisdatigon tiel facila kiel eble."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will "
+"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need."
+msgstr ""
+"La komenca menua ekrano havas plurajn elektojn, tamen defaŭlte lanĉiĝos la "
+"mageja instalilo, kiu kutime havos ĉion kion oni bezonas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:35
+msgid "Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr "Bonveniga instal-ekrano"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" width="
+"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-"
+"intro-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use "
+"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Se okazus problemoj dum la instalado, tiam povus esti necese uzi specialajn "
+"instalajn elektojn, vidu <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:52
+msgid "The installation steps"
+msgstr "La instal-paŝoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
+"on the side panel of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+"La instal-procezo dividiĝas en serio da paŝoj, kiuj povas esti sekvataj per "
+"la flanka panelo de la ekrano."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉiu paŝo havas unu aŭ pliajn ekranojn kiuj povas ankaŭ havi "
+"<guibutton>Progresintan</guibutton> butonon kun aldonaj sed malofte "
+"bezonataj elektoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further "
+"explanations about the current step."
+msgstr ""
+"La plimulto el ekranoj havas butonon pri <guibutton>Helpo</guibutton> "
+"havigantan pliajn karigojn pri tiu paŝo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is "
+"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, "
+"sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe.  Post la formatigo de partigo aŭ post "
+"la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi ĝin "
+"povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio ke "
+"vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe.  Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt "
+"Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:80
+msgid "Installation options"
+msgstr "Instal-elektoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one "
+"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</"
+"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se la instalo malsukcesas tiam povas esti necese provi denove kaj uzi unu el "
+"la aldonaj elektoj aperontaj per la premo de la klavo F1 (Helpo), vidu <xref "
+"linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:87
+msgid "This will open the following text based help."
+msgstr "Ĉi tio malfermos la jenan teksto-bazitan helpon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:91
+msgid "Installation Help Screen"
+msgstr "Instala helpo-ekrano"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" width=\"720\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"400\" xml:id=\"installer-"
+"im2\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:105
+msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+msgstr "Instal-problemoj kaj eblaj solvoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:111
+msgid "No Graphical Interface"
+msgstr "Sen grafika interfaco"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
+"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low "
+"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+"Post la komenca ekrano vi eble ne alvenos al la ekrano pri lingvo-selekto. "
+"Ĉi tio povas okazi kun kelkaj grafik-kartoj kaj malnovaj maŝinoj. Provu "
+"utiligi malaltan rezolucion per la tajpo de \"vgalo\" en la komand-linio."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
+"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
+"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se la aparataro estas tre malnova, grafika instalo povas esti neebla. Ĉikaze "
+"povas esti rekomendinde provi teksto-bazitan instalon.  Por tio premu la "
+"klavon ESC en la unua bonveniga ekrano kaj konfirmu per ENTER. Tiam aperos "
+"nigra ekrano kun la vorto \"boot:\".  Tajpu \"text\" kaj premu ENTER. Nun "
+"daŭrigu la instaladon tekste.  <emphasis></emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:135
+msgid "The Install Freezes"
+msgstr "Instal-paneoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of "
+"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with "
+"other options as necessary."
+msgstr ""
+"Se la sistemo ŝajnas panei dum la instalo, tio povas esti pro aparatar-"
+"detekta problemo. Ĉikaze la aŭtomata detektado de aparatoj povas esti "
+"prokrastita. Por provi tion tajpu <code>noauto</code> en la komando-linio. "
+"Ĉi tiu elekto povas ankaŭ esti miksita kun la antaŭa se estas necese."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:147
+msgid "Kernel Options"
+msgstr "Kernaj elektoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
+"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+msgstr ""
+"Ili estos malofte necesaj, sed en kelkaj kazoj la aparataro povas kalkuli la "
+"disponeblan ĉefmemoron malĝuste. Por konkretigi ĝin permane vi povas utiligi "
+"la parametron mem=xxxM, kie xxx estas la ĝusta kvanto da ĉefmemoro. Ekzemple "
+"\"mem=256M\" specifus 256MB-ojn el ĉefmemoro."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23
+msgid "Install or Upgrade"
+msgstr "Instalado/ĝisdatigo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34
+msgid "Install"
+msgstr "Instalado"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Uzu tiun elekton por freŝa instalado de <application>Magejo</application> ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41
+msgid "Upgrade"
+msgstr "Ĝisdatigu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on "
+"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the "
+"latest release."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas unu aŭ pliajn ekzistantajn instalojn de <application>Magejo</"
+"application> en via sistemo, la instalilo ebligos vin ĝisdatigi unu el ili "
+"al la plej lasta versio."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
+"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
+"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
+"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, "
+"sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe.  Post la strukturado de subdisko aŭ "
+"post la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi "
+"ĝin povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio "
+"ke vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe.  Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt "
+"Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
+"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi rimarkas ke vi forgesis selekti aldonan lingvon, vi povas reveni el la "
+"ekrano \"Instalado/ĝisdatigo\" al la ekrano por lingva elekto per la premo "
+"de <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>.  <emphasis>Ne</emphasis> faru tion "
+"poste en la instalo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14
+msgid "Keyboard"
+msgstr "Klavaro"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX selektas adekvatan klavaron por via lingvo. Se ne estas disponebla ĝi "
+"aŭtomate elektos usonan klavaron."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" align=\"center"
+"\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Estu certa pri tio ke la selekto estas ĝusta aŭ elektu male alian klavaron. "
+"Se vi ne scias kiun klavaron vi havas rigardu la specifojn kiuj venas kun "
+"via sistemo aŭ demandu al la vendisto. Eble estas etikedo sur la klavaro kiu "
+"identigas ĝin. Vi ankaŭ povas rigardi ĉi tie: <link xlink:href=\"http://eo."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono\">eo.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono</link>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
+"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
+msgstr ""
+"Se via klavaro ne estas en la montrita listo klaku sur la butono "
+"<guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> por aliri etenditan liston kaj selektu vian "
+"klavaron tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
+"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
+"full list."
+msgstr ""
+"Post elekti klavaron per la butono <guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> , vi "
+"revenos al la unua priklavara ekrano sed povos ŝajni kvazaŭ klavaro de tiu "
+"ekrano estas elektita. Vi povas sentime ignori tiun anomalion kaj daŭrigi la "
+"instaladon: Via klavaro estas tiu kiun vi elektis per la etendita listo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin "
+"and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi elektis klavaron nebazitan sur latinaj literoj, vi vidos aldonan "
+"ekranon demandantan kiel vi ŝatus ŝanĝi inter latinaj kaj nelatinaj klavaroj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Services"
+msgstr "Konfiguru viajn Servojn"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi povas decidi kiuj servoj (ne) devus esti lanĉitaj je la starto de "
+"la sistemo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
+"see all services in it."
+msgstr ""
+"Estas kvar grupoj, klaku sur la triangulo kiu troviĝas antaŭ grupo por "
+"etendi ĝin kaj vidi ĉiujn servojn disponeblajn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:34
+msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good."
+msgstr "La elekto kiun faris DrakX estas kutime adekvata."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+msgstr "Se vi elektas servon, iu informo pri ĝi montriĝos en la suba skatolo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:41
+msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+msgstr "Ŝanĝu aferojn nur se vi scias tre bone kion vi estas faranta."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23
+msgid "Please choose a language to use"
+msgstr "Bv. elekti la uzotan lingvon"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during "
+"the installation and for your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+"Selektu vian preferatan lingvon unue per la disfaldo de via kontinenta "
+"listo. <application>Magejo</application> uzos ĉi tiun selekton dum la "
+"instalado kaj por la instalita sistemo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
+"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
+"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi bezonas instali en via sistemo plurajn lingvojn por vi aŭ aliaj "
+"uzuloj, tiam vi devas utiligi la butonon <guibutton>Multaj lingvoj (Multiple "
+"languages)</guibutton> por aldoni ilin nun. Estos malfacile aldoni plian "
+"lingvan eltenon post la instalo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
+"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi elektas pli ol unu lingvon, vi devas selekti unu el ili kiel vian "
+"preferatan lingvon en la komenca lingva ekrano. Ĝi markiĝos ankaŭ en la "
+"plurlingva ekrano ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well."
+msgstr ""
+"Se via klavara lingvo ne estas la sama kiel via preferata lingvo, tiam estas "
+"rekomendinde instali la lingvon de via klavaro ankaŭ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the "
+"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your "
+"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages."
+msgstr ""
+"Magejo uzas UTF-8 (Unikodon) defaŭlte. Ĉi tio povas esti malŝaltita en la "
+"plurlingva ekrano se vi certas pri tio ke ĝi estas neadekvata por via "
+"lingvo. Malŝalti unikodon havos konsekvencojn sur ĉiuj instalitaj lingvoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia "
+"Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi povas ŝanĝi la lingvon de via sistemo post la instalo per la Kontrolilo "
+"de Magejo -&gt; Sistemo -&gt; Agordi skrib-sistemojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4
+msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03 
+#.  test comment - johnr 
+#.  2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
+"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25
+msgid "Partitioning"
+msgstr "Kreo de subdiskoj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the "
+"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"En tiu ĉi ekrano vi povas vidi la enhavon de via(j) stor-aparato(j) kaj la "
+"loko-proponon de DrakX por la instalo de <application>Magejo</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your "
+"particular hard drive(s) layout and content."
+msgstr ""
+"La disponeblaj elektoj en la suba listo varios depende de la trajtoj kaj "
+"enhavo de via konkreta(j)  stor-aparato(j)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" align=\"center"
+"\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45
+msgid "Use Existing Partitions"
+msgstr "Uzu ekzistantajn subdiskojn"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se tiu elekto estas disponebla oni trovis linuks-akordigeblajn subdiskojn "
+"kiuj povas esti utiligataj por la instalo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54
+msgid "Use Free Space"
+msgstr "Uzu liberan spacon"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en via fiksita disko ĉi tiu elekto uzos ĝin por "
+"nova Mageja instalo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62
+msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition"
+msgstr "Uzu la liberan spacon de vindoza subdisko"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en ekzistanta vindoza subdisko, la instalilo "
+"povas proponi utiligi ĝin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, "
+"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all "
+"important files!"
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tio povas esti utila maniero atingi spacon por via nova Mageja instalo, "
+"sed temas pri riska operacio do vi devus fari sekurec-kopion de ĉiuj gravaj "
+"dosieroj antaŭe!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The "
+"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to "
+"back up your personal files."
+msgstr ""
+"Rimarku ke ĉi tio implikas la ŝrumpigon de la vindoza subdisko. La subdisko "
+"devas esti \"pura\", tio estas Vindozo devis fermiĝi senprobleme la lastan "
+"fojon kiam ĝi estis uzita. Ĝi ankaŭ devas esti malfragmentiĝita kvankam tio "
+"ne estas garantio pri tio ke ĉiuj dosieroj en la subdisko estis movitaj el "
+"la areo uzota. Estas ege rekomendinde realigi sekurec-kopion de viaj "
+"personaj dosieroj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84
+msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk."
+msgstr "Forviŝu kaj uzu la tutan diskon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87
+msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia."
+msgstr "Ĉi tiu elekto utiligos la tutan diskon por Magejo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90
+msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!"
+msgstr ""
+"Atentu! Ĉi tio forigos ĈIUJN datumojn en la elektita fiksita disko. Estu "
+"zorgema!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already "
+"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use "
+"this option."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi volas uzi parton de la disko por alia celo aŭ vi havas datumojn en la "
+"disko kiujn vi ne volas perdi, ne elektu ĉi tion."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100
+msgid "Custom"
+msgstr "Subdiskigo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tio havigas al vi plenan kontrolon sur la lokigo de la instalo en via(j) "
+"fiksita(j)  disko(j)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
+"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
+"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
+"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+msgstr ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
+"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
+"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
+"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117
+msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\""
+msgstr "\"Align to\" \"MiB\""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119
+msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\""
+msgstr "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes."
+msgstr ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5
+msgid "Desktop Selection"
+msgstr "Grafika medio"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
+"tune your choice."
+msgstr "Depende de viaj elektoj ĉi tie, povos aperi aliaj agordaj ekranoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package "
+"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the "
+"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button"
+msgstr ""
+"Post la selekto-paŝo(j), vi vidos glitan ekranon dum la pakaĵ-instalo.  La "
+"glitado povas esti malaktivigita premante la butonon <guilabel>Detaloj</"
+"guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or "
+"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full "
+"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if "
+"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the "
+"default software choices for these desktop environments. The "
+"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, "
+"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"Elektu ĉu vi preferas uzi la labortablajn mediojn <application>KDE-on</"
+"application> aŭ <application>Gnome-on</application>. Ambaŭ venas kun "
+"kompleta aro da utilaj aplikaĵoj kaj iloj. Aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi</"
+"guilabel> se vi volas utiligi unu aŭ ambaŭ, aŭ se vi volas personigi la "
+"defaŭltajn program-elektojn de tiuj labortablaj medioj.  La labortablo "
+"<application>LXDE-o</application> estas pli malpeza ol la du antaŭaj.  Ĝi "
+"havas malpli da grafikaj uzulaj interfacoj kaj pakaĵoj instalitaj defaŭlte."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4
+msgid "Package Group Selection"
+msgstr "Pakaĵaj grupoj"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+msgstr ""
+"Pakaĵoj estis arigitaj en grupoj por plifaciligi la elekton de tio kion vi "
+"bezonas en via sistemo. La grupoj estas sufiĉe memklarigaj, tamen plia "
+"informo pri la enhavo de ĉiu pakaĵaro estas disponebla kiam oni metas la "
+"musan montrilon sur ili."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23
+msgid "Workstation."
+msgstr "Laborstacio."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27
+msgid "Server."
+msgstr "Servilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31
+msgid "Graphical Environment."
+msgstr "Grafika medio."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
+"remove packages."
+msgstr ""
+"Elektado de individuaj pakaĵoj: vi povas uzi ĉi tiun elekton por aldoni aŭ "
+"forigi permane pakaĵojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+msgstr ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4
+msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
+msgstr "Elekto de individuaj pakaĵoj"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti aŭ malelekti aldonajn pakaĵojn por agordi vian "
+"instalon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
+"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
+"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
+"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
+"choosing to load it."
+msgstr ""
+"Post fari vian elekton, vi povas klaki sur la <guibutton>disketa ikono</"
+"guibutton> sube en la paĝo por konservi vian pakaĵ-elekton (konservi en USB-"
+"ŝlosilo funkcias ankaŭ). Vi povos utiligi ĉi tiun dosieron por instali la "
+"samajn pakaĵojn en aliaj sistemo klakante sur la sama butono dum la "
+"instalado kaj elektante ŝarĝi ĝin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:19
+msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake"
+msgstr "Agordi subdiskon per DiskDrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
+"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi volas utiligi ĉifradon en via subdisko <literal>/</literal> vi devas "
+"havi apartan subdiskon <literal>/boot</literal>.  La ĉifrada elekto por la "
+"subdisko <literal>/boot</literal> ne devas esti selektita, alie via sistemo "
+"ne startos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
+"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
+"is in them before you start."
+msgstr ""
+"Agordu via(j)n disko(j)n ĉi tie. Vi povas forigi aŭ krei subdiskojn, ŝanĝi "
+"la dosiersistemon de subdisko aŭ ŝanĝi ĝian grandon kaj eĉ vidi kio estas en "
+"ĝi antaŭ ol komenci."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
+"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+msgstr ""
+"Estas langeto por ĉiu trovita fiksita disko aŭ alispeca stor-aparato kiel "
+"USB-ŝlosilo. Ekzemple sda, sdb kaj sdc se estas tri."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
+"storage device"
+msgstr ""
+"Premu <guibutton>Forviŝu ĉion</guibutton> por forigi ĉiujn subdiskojn en la "
+"elektita stor-aparato"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it."
+msgstr ""
+"Por aliaj agoj: klaku sur la dezirata subdisko unue. Tiam vi povos vidi ĝin, "
+"elekti dosiersistemon kaj surmetingon, ŝanĝi ĝian grandon aŭ forigi ĝin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:49
+msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes."
+msgstr "Daŭrigu ĝis kiam vi agordos ĉion laŭ via deziro."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:51
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready."
+msgstr "Klaku sur <guibutton>Finata</guibutton> kiam vi estos preta."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:4
+msgid "Congratulations"
+msgstr "Gratulon"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text 
+#.  same day, added "s" to "sytems"
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"exitInstall-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
+"your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Finiĝis la instalado kaj konfigurado de <application>Magejo</application> "
+"kaj nun vi povas sekure eltiri la instal-medion kaj reŝarĝi vian komputilon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
+"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+msgstr ""
+"Post tiu reŝarĝo, en la ŝarĝila ekrano vi povos elekti kiun operacian "
+"sistemon lanĉi (se vi havas pli ol unu)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi ne ŝanĝis la preferojn de la ŝarĝilo, Magejo estos aŭtomate elektita "
+"kaj ŝarĝita."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:31
+msgid "Enjoy!"
+msgstr "Ĝuu!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to "
+"Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+"Vizitu www.mageia.org se vi havas demandojn aŭ volas kontribui al Magejo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4
+msgid "Formatting"
+msgstr "Strukturi subdiskojn"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"formatPartitions-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti kiu(j)n subdisko(j)n vi ŝatus strukturi. Iu ajn "
+"datumo en subdisko(j) <emphasis>ne</emphasis> markita(j) por strukturado "
+"estos savita."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29
+msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted"
+msgstr "Kutime almenaŭ la subdiskoj elektitaj de DrakX bezonos strukturon"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to "
+"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Klaku sur <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> por elekti subdiskojn kie vi "
+"ŝatus kontroli ĉu ekzistas <emphasis>difektitaj blokoj</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> "
+"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.  "
+"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi ne certas ĉu vi faris la ĝustan elekton, vi povas klaki sur "
+"<guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton>, denove sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> kaj "
+"tiam sur <guibutton>subdiskigo</guibutton> por reveni al la ĉefa ekrano.  En "
+"tiu ekrano vi havas elekton por vidi kio estas en viaj subdiskoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> to continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi estas certa pri la elekto, klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton> "
+"por daŭrigi."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:3
+msgid "Updates"
+msgstr "Ĝisdatigoj"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 30 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename
+#.  marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some "
+"packages will have been updated or improved."
+msgstr ""
+"Ekde la publikigo de ĉi tiu versio de <application>Magejo</application>, "
+"pluraj pakaĵoj estis probable ĝisdatigitaj aŭ plibonigitaj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, "
+"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+"Elektu <guilabel>jes</guilabel> se vi deziras elŝuti kaj instali ilin, "
+"elektu <guilabel>ne</guilabel> se vi ne volas fari tion nun aŭ se vi ne "
+"havas retaliron"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:28
+msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue"
+msgstr "Klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton> por daŭrigi"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:3
+msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
+msgstr "Diversaj parametroj"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 31 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! 
+#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots 
+#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+#.       the drakxid-miscellaneous section 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph 
+#.  2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. 
+#.  2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" 
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want after pressing "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX faris inteligentajn antaŭelektojn por la konfiguro de via sistemo "
+"dependante de tio kion vi elektis kaj la aparataro kiun ĝi mem eltrovis. Vi "
+"povas kontroli la konfigurojn ĉi tie kaj ŝanĝi ilin se vi volas klakante sur "
+"<guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:45
+msgid "System parameters"
+msgstr "Sistemaj parametroj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:50
+msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Horzono</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/"
+">"
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX elektis tempo-zonon por vi, dependante de via preferata lingvo. Vi "
+"povas ŝanĝi ĝin se bezonate. Vidu ankaŭ <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC"
+"\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:58
+msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Lando</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you "
+"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi ne troviĝas en la selektita lando, estas tre grave ke vi korektu ĝin.  "
+"Vidu <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:67
+msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Startŝarĝilo</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:69
+msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting."
+msgstr "DrakX faris bonajn elektojn por la konfiguro de la sistema ŝarĝilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo"
+msgstr "Ŝanĝu nenion se vi ne scias kiel konfiguri Grub kaj/aŭ Lilo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:75
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>"
+msgstr "Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:80
+msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Uzula administrado (User management)</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
+"literal> directories."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi povas aldoni pliajn uzulojn ĉi tie. Ĉiuj havos sian propran dosierujon "
+"<literal>/home</literal>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:89
+msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Servoj</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run the background "
+"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks."
+msgstr ""
+"Sistemaj servoj celas tiujn malgrandajn programojn funkciantajn fone "
+"(demonoj). Ĉi tiu ilo ebligos vin aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi diversajn taskojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi devus kontroli zorgeme antaŭ ol ŝanĝi ion ĉi tie - eraro povus okazigi ke "
+"via komputilo ne funkciu ĝuste."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:99
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:106
+msgid "Hardware parameters"
+msgstr "Aparatar-parametroj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:111
+msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Klavaro</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on "
+"your location, language or type of keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi konfiguras aŭ ŝanĝas vian klavar-agordon kiu dependas de via "
+"lando, lingvo aŭ klavar-speco."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:119
+msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Muso</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi povas aldoni aŭ konfiguri aliajn indikajn aparatojn, tabuletojn, "
+"mov-globojn, ktp."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:126
+msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Son-karto </guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the "
+"options selected will work with your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin agordi vian son-karton. En la plimulto el okazoj "
+"la selektitaj elektoj funkcios en via komputilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:135
+msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Grafika interfaco</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:138
+msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian grafik-karto(j)n kaj montrilo(j)n."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:141
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>."
+msgstr "Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im2\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:155
+msgid "Network and Internet parameters"
+msgstr "Retaj parametroj"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:161
+msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Reto</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media "
+"repositories."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi povas konfiguri vian reton ĉi tie, sed por ret-kartoj utiligantaj "
+"neliberajn pelilojn estas plibone fari tion post la reŝarĝo de la sistemo "
+"per <application>Mageja Konfigurilo </application>. Por tio vi devos "
+"aktivigi la neliberajn deponejojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:170
+msgid ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch "
+"that interface as well."
+msgstr ""
+"Kiam vi aldonas ret-karton ne forgesu konfiguri vian fajronŝirmilon por ke "
+"ĝi kontrolu ankaŭ tiun ret-interfacon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:177
+msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Prokuraj serviloj</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+msgstr ""
+"Prokura servilo funkcias kiel peranto inter via komputilo kaj interreto.  Ĉi "
+"tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian komputilon por utiligi prokuran servon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
+"need to enter here"
+msgstr ""
+"Eble vi devas konsulti vian ret-mastrumanton por scii la parametrojn kiujn "
+"vi devas enigi ĉi tie"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:193
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Sekureco"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:198
+msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Sekurec-nivelo </guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
+"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+msgstr ""
+"Ĉi tie vi starigas la sekurec-nivelon por via komputilo, en la plimulto el "
+"okazoj la defaŭlta konfiguro estas adekvata por ĝenerala uzo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:205
+msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage."
+msgstr "Aktivigu la elekton pli adekvatan laŭ viaj bezonoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:210
+msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Fajroŝirmilo (Fajromuro)</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the "
+"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it."
+msgstr ""
+"Fajroŝirmilo celas esti bariero inter viaj gravaj datumoj kaj la friponoj en "
+"la reto kiuj volas kompromiti aŭ forŝteli ilin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your "
+"selections will depend on what you use your computer for."
+msgstr ""
+"Elektu la servojn kiuj devas havi aliron al via sistemo. Viaj elektoj "
+"dependos de tio por kio vi utiligas la komputilon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:221
+msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky."
+msgstr "Rimarku ke ebligi ĉion (sen fajroŝirmilo) povas esti tre riska."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Timezone"
+msgstr "Konfiguru vian horzonon"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
+"same time zone."
+msgstr ""
+"Elektu vian horzonon selektante vian landon aŭ urbon proksiman kiu troviĝu "
+"en la sama tempo-zono."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
+"GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr ""
+"En la sekva ekrano vi povas alĝustigi vian sisteman horloĝon je la loka horo "
+"aŭ je GTM, ankaŭ konata kiel UTC."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas pli ol unu operacia sistemo en via komputilo, certiĝu pri tio ke "
+"ili estas alĝustigitaj ĉiuj je la loka horo aŭ je UTC/GTM."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+"Grando-ŝanĝo de la subdisko <application>Vindoza<superscript>®</"
+"superscript></application>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi havas pli ol unu <application>Vindoza<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> subdisko.  Elektu kiu devus esti malgrandigita cele al liberigo "
+"de spaco por la instalo de <application>Magejo</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11
+msgid "Setup SCSI"
+msgstr "Konfiguri SCSI"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 
+#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) 
+#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" width="
+"\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
+"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"fail to recognise the drive."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX kutime trovas fiksitajn diskojn senprobleme. Ĝi tamen povas ne trovi "
+"kelkajn malnovajn SCSI-aparatojn kaj do malsukcesi pri la instalado de la "
+"bezonataj peliloj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
+"you have."
+msgstr ""
+"Se tio okazas, vi devos permane diri al Drakx kiun SCSI-aparaton vi havas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
+msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly."
+msgstr "DrakX devus tiam esti kapabla konfiguri la aparato(j)n ĝuste."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:4
+msgid "Select mouse"
+msgstr "Selekti muson"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"selectMouse-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vin ne kontentigas la funkciado de via muso, vi povas elekti iun malsaman "
+"ĉi tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
+"guilabel> is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Ofte, <guilabel>Universala</guilabel> - <guilabel>Ajna PS/2- kaj USB-musoj</"
+"guilabel> estas bona elekto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to "
+"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons."
+msgstr ""
+"Selektu <guilabel>Universalan</guilabel> - <guilabel>Trudi evdev</guilabel> "
+"por konfiguri la butonojn kiuj ne funkcias en muso kun ses aŭ pli butonoj."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3
+msgid "Bootloader main options"
+msgstr "Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj"
+
+#.  2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+#.  2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloader-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
+"the installer, you can change them here."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi preferas malsaman lanĉilan konfiguron al tiu elektita aŭtomate fare de "
+"la instalilo, vi povas ŝanĝi ĝin ĉi tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
+"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"allow Mageia to create a new one."
+msgstr ""
+"Eble vi havas jam alian operacian sistemon en via maŝino, tiukaze vi devas "
+"decidi ĉu vi volas aldoni Magejon al via ekzistanta lanĉilo aŭ ebligi al "
+"Magejo krei novan."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26
+msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)"
+msgstr "La grafika menuo de Magejo estas bela :)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32
+msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader"
+msgstr "Uzi la lanĉilon de Magejo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR "
+"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other "
+"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia "
+"boot menu."
+msgstr ""
+"Defaŭlte Magejo skribas novan GRUB-lanĉilon en la MBR de via unua fiksita "
+"disko.  Se vi jam havas aliajn operaciajn sistemojn, Magejo provos aldoni "
+"ilin al via nova Mageja lanĉilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+msgstr ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+msgstr ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+msgstr ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56
+msgid "Using an existing bootloader"
+msgstr "Uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
+"bootloader install location."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi decidas uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon tiam vi devos klaki sur la lanĉila "
+"butono <guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>, kiu ebligos vin ŝanĝi la instal-"
+"lokon de la lanĉilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
+"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"phase earlier, e.g.  sda7."
+msgstr ""
+"Ne selektu aparaton kiel \"sda\" aŭ vi anstataŭigos la ekzistantan MBR. Vi "
+"devas selekti la saman radikan subdiskon kiun vi elektis dum la subdiskigo, "
+"ekzemple sda7."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71
+msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device."
+msgstr "Klarigcele, sda estas aparato, sda7 subdisko."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
+"the installer screen."
+msgstr ""
+"Iru al tty2 per la premo de Ctrl+Alt+F2 kaj tajpu <literal>df</literal> por "
+"vidi kie estas via radika subdisko <literal>/</literal>. Ctrl+Alt+F7 venigos "
+"vin ree al la instal-ekrano."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
+"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
+"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"question."
+msgstr ""
+"La ĝusta procezo por aldoni vian Magejan sistemon al ekzistanta lanĉilo "
+"estas preter la celo de tiu ĉi helpilo, tamen en la plimulto el la kazoj "
+"estos necese lanĉi lanĉilan instal-programon kiu devus detekti kaj konfiguri "
+"ĝin aŭtomate.  Vidu la dokumentaron por la konkreta operacia sistemo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91
+msgid "Bootloader advanced option"
+msgstr "Lanĉila sperta elekto"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
+"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi havas tre limigitan spacon en via disko por subdisko <literal>/</"
+"literal> enhavanta samtempe la dosierujon <literal>/tmp</literal>, klaku sur "
+"<guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> kaj aktivigu la skatolon dirantan "
+"<guilabel>Purigu /tmp dum ĉiuj startadoj</guilabel>. Tio helpos teni iom da "
+"libera spaco."
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "eo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:3
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr "Instalado per DrakX-o"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:6
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr "<note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+"Neniu vidos ĉiujn ekranojn, kiujn vi vidas en ĉi helpo. Tio kiujn ekranojn "
+"vi vidos, dependas de via komputilo kaj viaj elektoj dum instalado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:10
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr "</note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"La tekstoj kaj la ekranbildoj en ĉi helpo estas sub licenco CC-BY-SA 3.0 "
+"<link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://"
+"creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Tiu ĉi helpo estas skribita kun helpo de <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco."
+"com\">Calenco CMS</link> kreita per <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz"
+"\">NeoDoc</link>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16
+msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69
+msgid "vendor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36
+msgid "then the name of your card"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40
+msgid "and the type of card"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"Xorg category"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
+"drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
+"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the Commandline Interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some "
+"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to "
+"access them, you should do this after your first reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18
+msgid "Choosing your Monitor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage "
+"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing "
+"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor "
+"documentation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
+msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55
+msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
+"monitor database."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63
+msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73
+msgid "the monitor manufacturers name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77
+msgid "the monitor description"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82
+msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
+"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
+"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
+"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4
+msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
+msgstr "Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron"
+
+#.  Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
+"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
+"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
+"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
+"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
+"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
+"think the choice is incorrect."
+msgstr ""
+"Ne gravas kiun grafikan medion (ankaŭ konata kiel labortabla medio) vi "
+"elektis por ĉi tiu instalo de <application>Magejo</application>, ili ĉiuj "
+"baziĝas sur grafika uzula interfaco nomita <acronym>X Window System</"
+"acronym>, aŭ simple <acronym>X</acronym>. Do cele al bona funkciado de "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> aŭ "
+"iu alia grafika medio, la jena konfiguro de <acronym>X</acronym> devas esti "
+"ĝusta.  Elektu la ĝustan konfiguron se vi rimarkas ke <application>DrakX</"
+"application> ne elektis konfiguron aŭ vi pensas ke tiu elekto estas malĝusta."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card "
+"from the list if needed."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Grafik-karto </guibutton></emphasis>: Elektu vian "
+"karton en la listo se bezonate."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor "
+"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. "
+"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the "
+"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Ekrano</guibutton></emphasis>: Vi povas elekti "
+"<guilabel>\"Plug'n Play\"</guilabel> siakaze aŭ elekti vian monitoron en la "
+"<guilabel>Vendista</guilabel> aŭ <guilabel>Ĝenerala</guilabel> listo. Elektu "
+"<guilabel>Akomodata</guilabel> se vi preferas permane starigi la "
+"horizontalan kaj vertikalan refreŝ-datumon de via monitoro."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45
+msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor"
+msgstr "Malĝustaj refreŝ-datumoj povas damaĝi vian monitoron"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
+"resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Distingivo</guibutton></emphasis>: Starigu la deziratan "
+"distingivon kaj kolorprofundon de via monitoro ĉi tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
+"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
+"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
+"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
+"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Testo</guibutton></emphasis>: La testo-butono ne ĉiam "
+"aperas dum la instalo. Se la butono estas tie, vi povas testi vian "
+"konfiguron premante ĝin. Se vi vidas demandon demandantan vin ĉu via "
+"konfiguro ĝustas, vi povas respondi \"jes\" kaj la konfiguro estos "
+"konservita. Se vi vidas nenion vi revenos al konfigur-ekrano kaj povos "
+"rekonfiguri ĉion ĝis kiam la testo sukcesos. <emphasis>Certiĝu pri tio ke "
+"via konfiguro estas ĝusta se la testo-butono ne estas disponebla</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
+"enable or disable various options."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Opcioj</guibutton></emphasis>: Ĉi tie vi povas aktvigi "
+"aŭ malaktivigi kelkajn elektojn."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5
+msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the "
+"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen "
+"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an "
+"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a "
+"choice while booting up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't "
+"just try something without knowing what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:3
+msgid "Minimal Install"
+msgstr "Minimuma instalo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Vi povas elekti Minimuman Instalon malselektante ĉion en la Pakaĵara Elekta "
+"ekrano, vidu <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised "
+"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package "
+"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Minimuma Instalo celas konkretajn uzojn por Magejo kiel servilojn aŭ "
+"specialigitajn laborstaciojn. Probable vi uzos ĉi tiun elekton kune kun "
+"Permana Pakaĵ-elekto, vidu <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer "
+"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi elektas ĉi tian instalon la venonta ekrano proponos al vi instali "
+"plurajn utilajn aldonaĵojn kiel dokumentojn aŭ Ikso-servilon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:12
+msgid "Security Level"
+msgstr "Sekurec-nivelo"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:24
+msgid "You can adjust your security level here."
+msgstr "Vi povas alĝustigi vian sekurec-nivelon ĉi tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose."
+msgstr "Lasu la defaŭltan konfiguron senŝanĝe se vi ne scias kion elekti."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings "
+"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center."
+msgstr ""
+"Post la instalo, ĉiam eblos alĝustigi la sekurec-konfiguron en la fako "
+"<guilabel>Sekureco</guilabel> en la Mageja Kontrolilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:13
+msgid "Select your Country / Region"
+msgstr "Elektu vian Landon / Regionon"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network."
+msgstr ""
+"Selektu vian landon aŭ regionon. Ĉi tio estas grava por ĉiaj konfiguroj, "
+"kiel la monero kaj senkabla reguliga domajno. Konfiguri eraran landon povus "
+"kaŭzi ke vi ne kapablu utiligi senkablan reton."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
+"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+msgstr ""
+"Se via lando ne estas en la listo, klaku sur la butono <guilabel>Aliaj "
+"Landoj</guilabel> kaj elektu vian landon / regionon tie."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, "
+"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the "
+"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Se via lando estas nur en la listo <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel>, post "
+"klaki sur <guibutton>Enorde</guibutton> povas ŝajni ke vi elektis landon de "
+"la unua listo.  Bv. ignori tion, DrakX daŭrigos kun via reala elekto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:46
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr "Enir-metodo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
+"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
+"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+msgstr ""
+"En la ekrano <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel> vi povas ankaŭ elekti enir-"
+"metodon (sube en la listo). Enir-metodoj ebligas uzulojn tajpi mult-lingvajn "
+"literojn (ĉina, japana, korea, ktp.). IBus estas la defaŭlta enir-metodo en "
+"Magejaj DVD, kaj en Afrikaj/Barataj kaj Aziaj/ne-Barataj KD. Por aziaj kaj "
+"afrikaj tajp-konfiguroj, IBus agordos la defaŭltan enir-metodon aŭtomate "
+"tiel uzuloj ne bezonos konfiguri ĝin permane. Aliaj enir-metodoj (SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, ktp.) ankaŭ havigas similajn funkciojn kaj povas esti instalitaj "
+"se vi aldonis HTTP/FTP-an medion antaŭ la pakaĵa selekto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -&gt; "
+"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Se vi nevole preterpaŝis la enir-metodon dum la instalo, vi povas aliri ĝin "
+"post ŝarĝi la instalitan sistemon per \"Konfiguri vian Komputilon\" -> "
+"\"Sistemo\" aŭ lanĉante localdrake kiel mastrumanto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:3
+msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10
+msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
+"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"during the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29
+msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33
+msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With "
+"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Elektu fiksitan diskon purigotan por <application>Magejo</application>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install "
+#~ "<application>Mageia</application>."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Selektu la fiksitan diskon kiu devus esti strukturita por "
+#~ "<application>Magejo</application>."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk "
+#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Certiĝu pri tio ke vi elektas ĝustan fiksitan diskon. Ĉiuj datumoj en la "
+#~ "selektita disko perdiĝos. Ĉi tiu paŝo ne povas esti malfarita."
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)"
+#~ msgstr "Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj (old page)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main "
+#~ "options''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "the help button for this screen links to that file."
+
+#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)"
+#~ msgstr "Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron (old page)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card "
+#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because that is the file the help button for this screen links to."
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use"
+#~ msgstr "Lanĉila sperta uzo"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/"
+#~ "> first."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se vi ne faris jam bv. legi <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/> unue."
+
+#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually"
+#~ msgstr "Aldonante GRUB2-an bazitan sistemon permane"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:"
+#~ msgstr "GRUB2-a bazita sistemo povas esti aldonata al Mageja lanĉilo jene:"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version "
+#~ "run the following command in a terminal:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Lanĉu la sistemon aldonotan. Por identigi la GRUB2-an version lanĉu la "
+#~ "jenan komandon per terminalo:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "or if that fails try:"
+#~ msgstr "aŭ se tio malsukcesas provu:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom "
+#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 "
+#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during "
+#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se la rezulto estas \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (probable kun aldonaĵo), "
+#~ "tiam ĝi uzas GRUB (ankaŭ nomata GRUB legacy), ne GRUB2 kaj do via sistemo "
+#~ "devus esti identigita senprobleme fare de Magejo dum la instalo kaj "
+#~ "aldonita aŭtomate al la menuo."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se la rezulto estas (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, tiam ĝi uzas GRUB2."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root "
+#~ "partition:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Notu la version kaj enigu ĉi tiun komandon por identigi la radikan "
+#~ "subdiskon:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "This will output something like :"
+#~ msgstr "Ĉi tio vidigos ion tian :"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it."
+#~ msgstr "tiukaze sdb11 estas la radika subdisko - notu tion."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the "
+#~ "following command:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Nun kontrolu ĉu la dosierujo /boot estas en la sama subdisko enigante la "
+#~ "jenan komandon:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a "
+#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu."
+#~ "lst below."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se la subdisko /boot estas malsama al tiu radika tiam notu tion kaj uzu "
+#~ "la subdiskon /boot en la linio \"root\" kiam vi eldonos la dosieron menu."
+#~ "lst."
+
+#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia."
+#~ msgstr "Vi povas nun malŝalti la sistemon kaj instali Magejon."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the "
+#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "En via nova funkcianta Mageja sistemo, malfermu terminalon kaj kiel "
+#~ "mastrumanto eldonu la dosieron /boot/grub/menu.lst tiumaniere:"
+
+#~ msgid "To become root use:"
+#~ msgstr "Por agi kiel mastrumanto uzu:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(enter root password)"
+#~ msgstr "(enigu mastrumantan pasvorton)"
+
+#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:"
+#~ msgstr "Por malfermi la dosieron per tekstotraktilo uzu:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)"
+#~ msgstr "(anstataŭigu \"kwrite\" per \"gedit\" se vi estas uzanta Gnome)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the "
+#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on "
+#~ "its position in the file:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Aldonu la jenan enigon por via (ekzemple Ubuntuo) sistemo, probable kiel "
+#~ "dua elekto.  La loko en kiu ĝi aperas en la menuo dependas de la pozicio "
+#~ "en la dosiero:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" "
+#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy "
+#~ "GRUB count from zero."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "En la dua linio \"hd1\" signifas la duan fiksitan diskon, la nombro "
+#~ "\"10\" indikas ke temas pri la 11a subdisko. Diskoj kaj subdiskoj en GRUB "
+#~ "legacy de Magejo kalkuliĝas ekde nulo."
+
+#~ msgid "Therefore:"
+#~ msgstr "Do:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :"
+#~ msgstr "Se la versio de GRUB2 estas 2.xx tiam ŝanĝu la lastan linion al :"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub"
+#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se vi bezonis uzi \"grub2-install\" plifrue tiam ŝanĝu <literal>\"grub\"</"
+#~ "literal> al <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> en la lasta linio."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</"
+#~ "literal> from the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se /boot estis en aparta subdisko, tiam forigu <literal>\"/boot\"</"
+#~ "literal> el la lasta linio."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in "
+#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Konservu la dosieron kaj reŝarĝu la sistemon. Vi devus vidi vian \"Ubuntu"
+#~ "\"-an aldonaĵon en la menuo kaj ĝi devus esti lanĉebla."
+
+#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader"
+#~ msgstr "Uzi ekzistantan GRUB2-an lanĉilon"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader "
+#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se vi ankoraŭ ne legis la ĝeneralan parton pri la uzo de ekzistanta "
+#~ "lanĉilo, faru tion nun. Vidu <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some "
+#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding "
+#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details "
+#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the "
+#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Ekzistas konata eraro okazanta en GRUB2 en kelkaj versioj de Debiano/"
+#~ "Ubuntuo kiu malĝuste kreas la dosieron grub.cfg en la momento de la "
+#~ "aldono de Magejaj (aŭ Mandrivaj) sistemoj. Detalojn pri la maniero "
+#~ "korekti tion vi povas trovi en la forumo de Magejo. Serĉu \"prober\", la "
+#~ "temo estas \"grub problem\", la postaĵo #9 havas la informon."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel "
+#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub."
+#~ "d/40_custom</literal>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Por igi la korekton permanenta tiel ke ĝi postvivu kernajn ĝisdatigojn, "
+#~ "la Mageja linio devus esti aldonita al <literal>/etc/grub.d/40_custom</"
+#~ "literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. "
+#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the "
+#~ "preferred solution."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "La eraro estis korektita en os-prober-1.53 publikigita la 8an de majo "
+#~ "2012. Nun, ĝisdatigi al nova versio vian GRUB2-an instalon estas la plej "
+#~ "bona solvo."
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..178aab98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <title>Instalado per DrakX-o</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>Neniu vidos ĉiujn ekranojn, kiujn vi vidas en ĉi helpo. Tio kiujn ekranojn
+vi vidos, dependas de via komputilo kaj viaj elektoj dum instalado.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para>La tekstoj kaj la ekranbildoj en ĉi helpo estas sub licenco CC-BY-SA 3.0
+<link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link></para>
+
+      <para>Tiu ĉi helpo estas skribita kun helpo de <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> kreita per <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link></para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+
+
+  
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+ 
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  
+<!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ -->
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..961898be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="acceptLicense"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+       http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html  -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+       but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( 
+       ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not 
+       sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR  2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">Licenco kaj publikig-notoj</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-license.png" width="800"
+align="center" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="license">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="license-ti1">Licenco</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Antaŭ ol instali <application>Magejon</application>, bv. legi la licencon
+zorgeme.</para>
+
+    <para>Ĉi tiuj kondiĉoj aplikiĝas al la tuta distribuaĵo
+<application>Magejo</application> kaj devas esti akceptataj antaŭ ol daŭrigi
+la instaladon.</para>
+
+    <para>Por akcepti nur selektu <guilabel>Akceptu</guilabel> kaj klaku sur
+<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para>Se vi decidas ne akcepti tiujn kondiĉojn, tiam ni dankas vin pro via
+rigardo. Klakante sur <guibutton>Ĉesu</guibutton> vi reŝarĝos vian
+komputilon.</para>
+
+    
+  <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+       marja, 20120405  -->
+</section>
+
+  <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+    <!--
+  <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Publikig-notoj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+    <para>Por vidi kio estas nova en ĉi tiu versio de
+<application>Magejo</application>, klaku sur la butono
+<guibutton>Publikig-notoj (Release Notes)  </guibutton>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f909c16a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">Uzula kaj superuzula administrado</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+       changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+       about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+       disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+       screen), marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+       "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="root-password">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Kreo de mastrumanta pasvorto (Set administrator (root) password):</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Estas konsilinde por ĉiuj instaloj de <application>Magejo</application> krei
+superuzulan pasvorton, kutime nomita la <emphasis>mastrumanta (root)
+pasvorto</emphasis> en Linukso. Kiam vi tajpos pasvorton en la supra skatolo
+ĝia koloro ŝanĝiĝos el ruĝa al flava kaj verda dependante de la forto de la
+pasvorto. Verda kampo signifas ke vi estas uzanta fortan pasvorton. Vi devas
+retajpi la saman pasvorton en la plisuba skatolo, tio certigos ke vi ne
+mistajpis la unuan pasvorton dank'al komparo inter ambaŭ.</para>
+
+    <note xml:id="givePassword">
+      <para>En ĉiuj pasvortoj diferenciĝas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj, estas pli bone
+utiligi miksaĵon de literoj (majusklaj kaj minusklaj), nombroj kaj aliaj
+karaktroj en pasvorto.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="enterUser">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Enigo de uzulo (Enter a user)</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Aldonu uzulon ĉi tie. Uzulo havas malpli da rajtoj ol la superuzulo (root),
+sed sufiĉajn por retumi, utiligi oficej-programojn aŭ ludi komputil-ludojn
+kaj por io ajn kion la averaĝa uzulo faras perkomputile</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Piktogramo</guibutton>: se vi klakas sur ĉi tiu butono vi ŝanĝos
+la uzulan ikonon.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Vera nomo</guilabel>: Metu la uzulan realan nomon en ĉi tiu teksta
+skatolo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Saluta nomo (login name)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie eniru la uzulan
+salutan nomon aŭ lasu ke drakx-o utiligu version de la uzula vera
+nomo. <emphasis>La saluta nomo diferencigas inter majuskloj kaj
+minuskloj.</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Pasvorto</guilabel>: En ĉi tiu teksta skatolo vi devus tajpi la
+uzulan pasvorton. Estas kampo je la fino de la teksto-skatolo indikanta la
+forton de la pasvorto. (Vidu ankaŭ <xref linkend="givePassword"></xref>)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Pasvorto (denove)</guilabel>: Retajpu la uzulan pasvorton en ĉi
+tiu teksta skatolo kaj darkx kontrolos ĉu la pasvorto estas la sama en ĉiuj
+uzulaj pasvortaj teksto-skatoloj.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+   <note>
+      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but
+write protected) home directory.</para>
+
+      <para>However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC -
+System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected.</para>
+
+      <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised
+to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para>
+
+      <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all
+extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step
+during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+      <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para>
+   </note>
+
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Sperta uzulo-administrado</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Se la <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> butono estas klakita aperos ekrano
+ebliganta eldoni la konfiguron de la aldonata uzulo.  Krome, vi povas
+aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para>Ĉio konservita de gasto uzanta defaŭltan <emphasis>rbash-an</emphasis>
+gastan konton en la dosierujo /home estos forigita post la elsaluto.  La
+gasto devus konservi gravajn dosierojn en USB-ŝlosilo.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Aktivigi gastan konton (Enable guest account)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie
+vi povas aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton. Gasta konto ebligos gaston
+ensaluti kaj uzi la komputilon, sed ĝi havas pli da limigoj ol tiu de
+normalaj uzuloj.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Ŝelo</guilabel>: Ĉi tio vidigos liston ebligantan ŝanĝi la
+"shell"-on uzatan de la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. Oni povas elekti
+Bash-on, Dash-on kaj Sh-on</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Uzula ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tie vi povas starigi uzulan identigilon
+por la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. La identigilo estas nombro.  Lasu
+ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Grupa ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tio ebligas vin starigi grupan
+identigilon.  Ankaŭ temas pri nombro, kutime la sama kiel tiu de la
+uzulo. Lasu ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..928f37b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)</title>
+    </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The
+source selection determines which packages will be available for selection
+during the next steps.</para>
+
+  <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. </para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With
+the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS
+installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..21364f97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Elekti surmetingojn</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+       with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+       write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+align="center" width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Ĉi tie vi vidas la linuksajn subdiskojn kiuj estis trovitaj en via
+komputilo. Se vi ne akordas kun la sugestoj de
+<application>DrakX</application> vi povas ŝanĝi la surmetingojn.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Se vi ŝanĝas ion, certiĝu pri tio ke vi daŭre havas <literal>/</literal>
+(radikan) subdiskon.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Ĉiu subdisko estas montrita tiel: "Aparato" ("Kapablo", "Surmetingo",
+"Speco").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>"Aparato", konsistas el: "fiksita disko", ["fiksita diska litero"],
+"subdiska nombro" (ekzemple, "sda5").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Se vi havas multajn subdiskojn, vi povas elekti multajn malsamajn
+surmetingojn per la faldebla menuo, kiel <literal>/</literal>,
+<literal>/home</literal> kaj <literal>/var</literal>. Vi povas ankaŭ fari
+viajn proprajn surmetingojn kiel <literal>/video</literal> por subdisko kie
+vi volas konservi viajn filmojn, aŭ <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> por la
+<literal>/home</literal> subdisko de kaldrona instalo.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>En kazoj de subdiskoj al kiuj vi ne volas aliri vi povas lasi la surmetingan
+kampon malplena.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Klaku sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> se vi ne scias kion elekti, kaj tiam
+aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi subdiskon</guilabel>. En la aperonta ekrano, vi
+povas klaki sur konkreta subdisko por vidi ĝian specon kaj grandon.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>Se vi certas pri tio ke la surmetingoj estas ĝustaj, klaku sur
+<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>, kaj elektu ĉu vi nur volas strukturi la
+subdisko(j)n kiu(j)n sugestas DrakX aŭ pli da ili.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9c9dc626
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="chooseDesktop">
+
+
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Grafika medio</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+
+
+    <para>Depende de viaj elektoj ĉi tie, povos aperi aliaj agordaj ekranoj.</para>
+
+    <para>Post la selekto-paŝo(j), vi vidos glitan ekranon dum la pakaĵ-instalo.  La
+glitado povas esti malaktivigita premante la butonon
+<guilabel>Detaloj</guilabel></para>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Elektu ĉu vi preferas uzi la labortablajn mediojn
+<application>KDE-on</application> aŭ
+<application>Gnome-on</application>. Ambaŭ venas kun kompleta aro da utilaj
+aplikaĵoj kaj iloj. Aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi</guilabel> se vi volas utiligi
+unu aŭ ambaŭ, aŭ se vi volas personigi la defaŭltajn program-elektojn de
+tiuj labortablaj medioj.  La labortablo <application>LXDE-o</application>
+estas pli malpeza ol la du antaŭaj.  Ĝi havas malpli da grafikaj uzulaj
+interfacoj kaj pakaĵoj instalitaj defaŭlte.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aa6d6d96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="choosePackageGroups">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Pakaĵaj grupoj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" width="800" depth="600"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Pakaĵoj estis arigitaj en grupoj por plifaciligi la elekton de tio kion vi
+bezonas en via sistemo. La grupoj estas sufiĉe memklarigaj, tamen plia
+informo pri la enhavo de ĉiu pakaĵaro estas disponebla kiam oni metas la
+musan montrilon sur ili.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Laborstacio.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Servilo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Grafika medio.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Elektado de individuaj pakaĵoj: vi povas uzi ĉi tiun elekton por aldoni aŭ
+forigi permane pakaĵojn.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install.</para> 
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..62d6611f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Elekto de individuaj pakaĵoj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Ĉi tie vi povas elekti aŭ malelekti aldonajn pakaĵojn por agordi vian
+instalon.</para>
+
+    <para>Post fari vian elekton, vi povas klaki sur la <guibutton>disketa
+ikono</guibutton> sube en la paĝo por konservi vian pakaĵ-elekton (konservi
+en USB-ŝlosilo funkcias ankaŭ). Vi povos utiligi ĉi tiun dosieron por
+instali la samajn pakaĵojn en aliaj sistemo klakante sur la sama butono dum
+la instalado kaj elektante ŝarĝi ĝin.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..af564bfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Konfiguru viajn Servojn</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Ĉi tie vi povas decidi kiuj servoj (ne) devus esti lanĉitaj je la starto de
+la sistemo.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">Estas kvar grupoj, klaku sur la triangulo kiu troviĝas antaŭ grupo por
+etendi ĝin kaj vidi ĉiujn servojn disponeblajn.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">La elekto kiun faris DrakX estas kutime adekvata.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">Se vi elektas servon, iu informo pri ĝi montriĝos en la suba skatolo.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Ŝanĝu aferojn nur se vi scias tre bone kion vi estas faranta.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e470a981
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Konfiguru vian horzonon</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Elektu vian horzonon selektante vian landon aŭ urbon proksiman kiu troviĝu
+en la sama tempo-zono.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">En la sekva ekrano vi povas alĝustigi vian sisteman horloĝon je la loka horo
+aŭ je GTM, ankaŭ konata kiel UTC.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">Se vi havas pli ol unu operacia sistemo en via komputilo, certiĝu pri tio ke
+ili estas alĝustigitaj ĉiuj je la loka horo aŭ je UTC/GTM.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fdaeabf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" 
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" 
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" 
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" 
+xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" 
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof  -->
+<!-- lproof  -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
+format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually
+correctly identify your video device.</para>
+  
+  <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know
+which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:
+    
+  <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>vendor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>then the name of your card</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>and the type of card</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+Xorg category</para>
+  
+  <para>The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card
+drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the
+option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
+	
+  <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the Commandline Interface.</para>
+	
+
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some
+cases only from the card manufacturers' websites </para>
+	
+  <para>The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to
+access them, you should do this after your first reboot.</para>
+	
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5a07631c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">Ne gravas kiun grafikan medion (ankaŭ konata kiel labortabla medio) vi
+elektis por ĉi tiu instalo de <application>Magejo</application>, ili ĉiuj
+baziĝas sur grafika uzula interfaco nomita <acronym>X Window
+System</acronym>, aŭ simple <acronym>X</acronym>. Do cele al bona funkciado
+de <acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym>
+aŭ iu alia grafika medio, la jena konfiguro de <acronym>X</acronym> devas
+esti ĝusta.  Elektu la ĝustan konfiguron se vi rimarkas ke
+<application>DrakX</application> ne elektis konfiguron aŭ vi pensas ke tiu
+elekto estas malĝusta.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Grafik-karto </guibutton></emphasis>: Elektu vian
+karton en la listo se bezonate.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Ekrano</guibutton></emphasis>: Vi povas elekti
+<guilabel>"Plug'n Play"</guilabel> siakaze aŭ elekti vian monitoron en la
+<guilabel>Vendista</guilabel> aŭ <guilabel>Ĝenerala</guilabel> listo. Elektu
+<guilabel>Akomodata</guilabel> se vi preferas permane starigi la
+horizontalan kaj vertikalan refreŝ-datumon de via monitoro.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Malĝustaj refreŝ-datumoj povas damaĝi vian monitoron</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Distingivo</guibutton></emphasis>: Starigu la deziratan
+distingivon kaj kolorprofundon de via monitoro ĉi tie.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Testo</guibutton></emphasis>: La testo-butono ne ĉiam
+aperas dum la instalo. Se la butono estas tie, vi povas testi vian
+konfiguron premante ĝin. Se vi vidas demandon demandantan vin ĉu via
+konfiguro ĝustas, vi povas respondi "jes" kaj la konfiguro estos
+konservita. Se vi vidas nenion vi revenos al konfigur-ekrano kaj povos
+rekonfiguri ĉion ĝis kiam la testo sukcesos. <emphasis>Certiĝu pri tio ke
+via konfiguro estas ĝusta se la testo-butono ne estas disponebla</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Opcioj</guibutton></emphasis>: Ĉi tie vi povas aktvigi
+aŭ malaktivigi kelkajn elektojn.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7ef4904a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+correctly identify yours.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage
+your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing
+what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor
+documentation</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Custom</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh
+rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
+screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are
+displayed.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor
+type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
+may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
+monitor database.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Vendor</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>vendor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor manufacturers name</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor description</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver
+when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it
+may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..779b3cda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="diskdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+	
+	
+	
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on
+    any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on
+      your <literal>
+/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root 
+      Also added some text. -->
+<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs-->
+<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Agordi subdiskon per DiskDrake</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
+align="center"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+<warning>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">Se vi volas utiligi ĉifradon en via subdisko <literal>/</literal> vi devas
+havi apartan subdiskon <literal>/boot</literal>.  La ĉifrada elekto por la
+subdisko <literal>/boot</literal> ne devas esti selektita, alie via sistemo
+ne startos.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Agordu via(j)n disko(j)n ĉi tie. Vi povas forigi aŭ krei subdiskojn, ŝanĝi
+la dosiersistemon de subdisko aŭ ŝanĝi ĝian grandon kaj eĉ vidi kio estas en
+ĝi antaŭ ol komenci.
+ </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">Estas langeto por ĉiu trovita fiksita disko aŭ alispeca stor-aparato kiel
+USB-ŝlosilo. Ekzemple sda, sdb kaj sdc se estas tri.
+  </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Premu <guibutton>Forviŝu ĉion</guibutton> por forigi ĉiujn subdiskojn en la
+elektita stor-aparato</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">Por aliaj agoj: klaku sur la dezirata subdisko unue. Tiam vi povos vidi ĝin,
+elekti dosiersistemon kaj surmetingon, ŝanĝi ĝian grandon aŭ forigi ĝin.</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Daŭrigu ĝis kiam vi agordos ĉion laŭ via deziro. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7">Klaku sur <guibutton>Finata</guibutton> kiam vi estos preta.</para> </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f39db611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-20 Yes I agree with Lebarhon - reference to home partition removed -->
+<!-- Simonnzg - doing anything to a Windows partition is DANGEROUS. I would prefer 
+       if this was not an option, but... -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 put the para xml id's back.  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-29 changed text as discussed on the ml and with papoteur's approval
+ lebarhon: 2012-08-18 warning added-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 changed warning to text suggested by Dave Hodgings in bug 9594 -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by obgr_seneca -->
+<!-- lebarhon 2013-04-11 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by Dave Hodgins/Marja-->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Kreo de subdiskoj</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">En tiu ĉi ekrano vi povas vidi la enhavon de via(j) stor-aparato(j) kaj la
+loko-proponon de DrakX por la instalo de <application>Magejo</application>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">La disponeblaj elektoj en la suba listo varios depende de la trajtoj kaj
+enhavo de via konkreta(j)  stor-aparato(j).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+align="center"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Uzu ekzistantajn subdiskojn</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">Se tiu elekto estas disponebla oni trovis linuks-akordigeblajn subdiskojn
+kiuj povas esti utiligataj por la instalo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">Uzu liberan spacon</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en via fiksita disko ĉi tiu elekto uzos ĝin por
+nova Mageja instalo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Uzu la liberan spacon de vindoza subdisko</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en ekzistanta vindoza subdisko, la instalilo
+povas proponi utiligi ĝin.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">Ĉi tio povas esti utila maniero atingi spacon por via nova Mageja instalo,
+sed temas pri riska operacio do vi devus fari sekurec-kopion de ĉiuj gravaj
+dosieroj antaŭe!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Rimarku ke ĉi tio implikas la ŝrumpigon de la vindoza subdisko. La subdisko
+devas esti "pura", tio estas Vindozo devis fermiĝi senprobleme la lastan
+fojon kiam ĝi estis uzita. Ĝi ankaŭ devas esti malfragmentiĝita kvankam tio
+ne estas garantio pri tio ke ĉiuj dosieroj en la subdisko estis movitaj el
+la areo uzota. Estas ege rekomendinde realigi sekurec-kopion de viaj
+personaj dosieroj.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Forviŝu kaj uzu la tutan diskon.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">Ĉi tiu elekto utiligos la tutan diskon por Magejo.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Atentu! Ĉi tio forigos ĈIUJN datumojn en la elektita fiksita disko. Estu
+zorgema!</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">Se vi volas uzi parton de la disko por alia celo aŭ vi havas datumojn en la
+disko kiujn vi ne volas perdi, ne elektu ĉi tion.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">Subdiskigo</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">Ĉi tio havigas al vi plenan kontrolon sur la lokigo de la instalo en via(j)
+fiksita(j)  disko(j).</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available
+hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested
+with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1
+MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning
+tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following
+settings: </para>
+
+    <para>"Align to" "MiB" </para>
+
+    <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2" </para>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f70f8f7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Gratulon</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text -->
+<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="exitInstall-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">Finiĝis la instalado kaj konfigurado de <application>Magejo</application>
+kaj nun vi povas sekure eltiri la instal-medion kaj reŝarĝi vian komputilon.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">Post tiu reŝarĝo, en la ŝarĝila ekrano vi povos elekti kiun operacian
+sistemon lanĉi (se vi havas pli ol unu).</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">Se vi ne ŝanĝis la preferojn de la ŝarĝilo, Magejo estos aŭtomate elektita
+kaj ŝarĝita. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Ĝuu!</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Vizitu www.mageia.org se vi havas demandojn aŭ volas kontribui al Magejo </para>
+  
+  
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6a6590f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="formatPartitions">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Strukturi subdiskojn</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Ĉi tie vi povas elekti kiu(j)n subdisko(j)n vi ŝatus strukturi. Iu ajn
+datumo en subdisko(j) <emphasis>ne</emphasis> markita(j) por strukturado
+estos savita.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Kutime almenaŭ la subdiskoj elektitaj de DrakX bezonos strukturon</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Klaku sur <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> por elekti subdiskojn kie vi
+ŝatus kontroli ĉu ekzistas <emphasis>difektitaj blokoj</emphasis></para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">Se vi ne certas ĉu vi faris la ĝustan elekton, vi povas klaki sur
+<guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton>, denove sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> kaj
+tiam sur <guibutton>subdiskigo</guibutton> por reveni al la ĉefa ekrano.  En
+tiu ekrano vi havas elekton por vidi kio estas en viaj subdiskoj.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">Se vi estas certa pri la elekto, klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>
+por daŭrigi.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d7b8f9dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Ĝisdatigoj</title></info>
+
+
+
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> 
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Ekde la publikigo de ĉi tiu versio de <application>Magejo</application>,
+pluraj pakaĵoj estis probable ĝisdatigitaj aŭ plibonigitaj.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Elektu <guilabel>jes</guilabel> se vi deziras elŝuti kaj instali ilin,
+elektu <guilabel>ne</guilabel> se vi ne volas fari tion nun aŭ se vi ne
+havas retaliron</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton> por daŭrigi</para>
+
+</section>
+  
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml b/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0fa00a76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="installer">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header - 
+      seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving -->
+<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block 
+       - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes  -->
+<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong -->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, la instalilo de Magejo</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Se vi estas nova aŭ nesperta uzulo de GNU/Linukso, la instalilo de Magejo
+estas desegnita por igi vian instaladon aŭ ĝisdatigon tiel facila kiel eble.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <para>
+If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to
+  connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These
+  will be automatically detected and configured.</para> -->
+<para>La komenca menua ekrano havas plurajn elektojn, tamen defaŭlte lanĉiĝos la
+mageja instalilo, kiu kutime havos ĉion kion oni bezonas.</para>
+
+  <figure xml:id="dx-welcome">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Bonveniga instal-ekrano</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"
+width="800" align="center" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+  <para>Se okazus problemoj dum la instalado, tiam povus esti necese uzi specialajn
+instalajn elektojn, vidu <xref linkend="installationOptions"></xref>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationSteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">La instal-paŝoj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>La instal-procezo dividiĝas en serio da paŝoj, kiuj povas esti sekvataj per
+la flanka panelo de la ekrano.</para>
+
+    <para>Ĉiu paŝo havas unu aŭ pliajn ekranojn kiuj povas ankaŭ havi
+<guibutton>Progresintan</guibutton> butonon kun aldonaj sed malofte
+bezonataj elektoj.</para>
+
+    <para>La plimulto el ekranoj havas butonon pri <guibutton>Helpo</guibutton>
+havigantan pliajn karigojn pri tiu paŝo.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon,
+sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe.  Post la formatigo de partigo aŭ post
+la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi ĝin
+povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio ke
+vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe.  Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt
+Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationOptions">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti1">Instal-elektoj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Se la instalo malsukcesas tiam povas esti necese provi denove kaj uzi unu el
+la aldonaj elektoj aperontaj per la premo de la klavo F1 (Helpo), vidu <xref
+linkend="dx-welcome"></xref></para>
+
+    <para>Ĉi tio malfermos la jenan teksto-bazitan helpon.</para>
+
+    <figure xml:id="dx-help">
+<info>
+        <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti2">Instala helpo-ekrano</title>
+      </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-help.png"
+align="center" width="720" format="PNG" depth="400"
+xml:id="installer-im2"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <section xml:id="installationProblems">
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Instal-problemoj kaj eblaj solvoj</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <section xml:id="noX">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="noX-ti2">Sen grafika interfaco</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Post la komenca ekrano vi eble ne alvenos al la ekrano pri
+lingvo-selekto. Ĉi tio povas okazi kun kelkaj grafik-kartoj kaj malnovaj
+maŝinoj. Provu utiligi malaltan rezolucion per la tajpo de "vgalo" en la
+komand-linio.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para revision="2">Se la aparataro estas tre malnova, grafika instalo povas esti neebla. Ĉikaze
+povas esti rekomendinde provi teksto-bazitan instalon.  Por tio premu la
+klavon ESC en la unua bonveniga ekrano kaj konfirmu per ENTER. Tiam aperos
+nigra ekrano kun la vorto "boot:".  Tajpu "text" kaj premu ENTER. Nun
+daŭrigu la instaladon tekste.  <emphasis></emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="installFreezes">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">Instal-paneoj</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>Se la sistemo ŝajnas panei dum la instalo, tio povas esti pro
+aparatar-detekta problemo. Ĉikaze la aŭtomata detektado de aparatoj povas
+esti prokrastita. Por provi tion tajpu <code>noauto</code> en la
+komando-linio. Ĉi tiu elekto povas ankaŭ esti miksita kun la antaŭa se estas
+necese.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="kernelOptions">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">Kernaj elektoj</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>Ili estos malofte necesaj, sed en kelkaj kazoj la aparataro povas kalkuli la
+disponeblan ĉefmemoron malĝuste. Por konkretigi ĝin permane vi povas utiligi
+la parametron mem=xxxM, kie xxx estas la ĝusta kvanto da ĉefmemoro. Ekzemple
+"mem=256M" specifus 256MB-ojn el ĉefmemoro.</para>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..89717151
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Media Selection (Nonfree)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are
+available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories
+selection determines which packages will be available for selection during
+the next steps.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains
+the base of the distribution.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are
+free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain
+closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this
+repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers,
+firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bcb85acf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="minimal-install">
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimuma instalo</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+    <para>Vi povas elekti Minimuman Instalon malselektante ĉion en la Pakaĵara Elekta
+ekrano, vidu <xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>Minimuma Instalo celas konkretajn uzojn por Magejo kiel servilojn aŭ
+specialigitajn laborstaciojn. Probable vi uzos ĉi tiun elekton kune kun
+Permana Pakaĵ-elekto, vidu <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>Se vi elektas ĉi tian instalon la venonta ekrano proponos al vi instali
+plurajn utilajn aldonaĵojn kiel dokumentojn aŭ Ikso-servilon.</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c3088fc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Diversaj parametroj</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! -->
+<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots -->
+<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)-->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+      the drakxid-miscellaneous section -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph -->
+<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. -->
+<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" -->
+<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summary.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX faris inteligentajn antaŭelektojn por la konfiguro de via sistemo
+dependante de tio kion vi elektis kaj la aparataro kiun ĝi mem eltrovis. Vi
+povas kontroli la konfigurojn ĉi tie kaj ŝanĝi ilin se vi volas klakante sur
+<guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">Sistemaj parametroj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Horzono</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX elektis tempo-zonon por vi, dependante de via preferata lingvo. Vi
+povas ŝanĝi ĝin se bezonate. Vidu ankaŭ <xref
+linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Lando</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">Se vi ne troviĝas en la selektita lando, estas tre grave ke vi korektu ĝin.
+Vidu <xref linkend="selectCountry"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Startŝarĝilo</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX faris bonajn elektojn por la konfiguro de la sistema ŝarĝilo.</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Ŝanĝu nenion se vi ne scias kiel konfiguri Grub kaj/aŭ Lilo</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend="setupBootloader"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>Uzula administrado (User management)</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">Vi povas aldoni pliajn uzulojn ĉi tie. Ĉiuj havos sian propran dosierujon
+<literal>/home</literal>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>Servoj</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">Sistemaj servoj celas tiujn malgrandajn programojn funkciantajn fone
+(demonoj). Ĉi tiu ilo ebligos vin aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi diversajn taskojn.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">Vi devus kontroli zorgeme antaŭ ol ŝanĝi ion ĉi tie - eraro povus okazigi ke
+via komputilo ne funkciu ĝuste.</para>
+
+        <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Aparatar-parametroj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>Klavaro</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Ĉi tie vi konfiguras aŭ ŝanĝas vian klavar-agordon kiu dependas de via
+lando, lingvo aŭ klavar-speco.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>Muso</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Ĉi tie vi povas aldoni aŭ konfiguri aliajn indikajn aparatojn, tabuletojn,
+mov-globojn, ktp.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>Son-karto </guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin agordi vian son-karton. En la plimulto el okazoj
+la selektitaj elektoj funkcios en via komputilo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Grafika interfaco</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian grafik-karto(j)n kaj montrilo(j)n.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"></xref>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im2"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Retaj parametroj</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>Reto</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">Vi povas konfiguri vian reton ĉi tie, sed por ret-kartoj utiligantaj
+neliberajn pelilojn estas plibone fari tion post la reŝarĝo de la sistemo
+per <application>Mageja Konfigurilo </application>. Por tio vi devos
+aktivigi la neliberajn deponejojn.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">Kiam vi aldonas ret-karton ne forgesu konfiguri vian fajronŝirmilon por ke
+ĝi kontrolu ankaŭ tiun ret-interfacon.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Prokuraj serviloj</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">Prokura servilo funkcias kiel peranto inter via komputilo kaj interreto.  Ĉi
+tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian komputilon por utiligi prokuran
+servon.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">Eble vi devas konsulti vian ret-mastrumanton por scii la parametrojn kiujn
+vi devas enigi ĉi tie</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Sekureco</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Sekurec-nivelo </guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Ĉi tie vi starigas la sekurec-nivelon por via komputilo, en la plimulto el
+okazoj la defaŭlta konfiguro estas adekvata por ĝenerala uzo.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Aktivigu la elekton pli adekvatan laŭ viaj bezonoj.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Fajroŝirmilo (Fajromuro)</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">Fajroŝirmilo celas esti bariero inter viaj gravaj datumoj kaj la friponoj en
+la reto kiuj volas kompromiti aŭ forŝteli ilin.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Elektu la servojn kiuj devas havi aliron al via sistemo. Viaj elektoj
+dependos de tio por kio vi utiligas la komputilon.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Rimarku ke ebligi ĉion (sen fajroŝirmilo) povas esti tre riska.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..652765d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+  version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+   
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 commented the empty paragraphs out-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Grando-ŝanĝo de la subdisko
+<application>Vindoza<superscript>®</superscript></application></title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">Vi havas pli ol unu
+<application>Vindoza<superscript>®</superscript></application> subdisko.
+Elektu kiu devus esti malgrandigita cele al liberigo de spaco por la instalo
+de <application>Magejo</application>.</para>
+
+  
+   
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4b4eba1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Sekurec-nivelo</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+ 
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">Vi povas alĝustigi vian sekurec-nivelon ĉi tie.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Lasu la defaŭltan konfiguron senŝanĝe se vi ne scias kion elekti.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">Post la instalo, ĉiam eblos alĝustigi la sekurec-konfiguron en la fako
+<guilabel>Sekureco</guilabel> en la Mageja Kontrolilo.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..70dfa83f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Elektu vian Landon / Regionon</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Selektu vian landon aŭ regionon. Ĉi tio estas grava por ĉiaj konfiguroj,
+kiel la monero kaj senkabla reguliga domajno. Konfiguri eraran landon povus
+kaŭzi ke vi ne kapablu utiligi senkablan reton.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">Se via lando ne estas en la listo, klaku sur la butono <guilabel>Aliaj
+Landoj</guilabel> kaj elektu vian landon / regionon tie.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">Se via lando estas nur en la listo <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel>, post
+klaki sur <guibutton>Enorde</guibutton> povas ŝajni ke vi elektis landon de
+la unua listo.  Bv. ignori tion, DrakX daŭrigos kun via reala elekto.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Enir-metodo</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">En la ekrano <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel> vi povas ankaŭ elekti
+enir-metodon (sube en la listo). Enir-metodoj ebligas uzulojn tajpi
+mult-lingvajn literojn (ĉina, japana, korea, ktp.). IBus estas la defaŭlta
+enir-metodo en Magejaj DVD, kaj en Afrikaj/Barataj kaj Aziaj/ne-Barataj
+KD. Por aziaj kaj afrikaj tajp-konfiguroj, IBus agordos la defaŭltan
+enir-metodon aŭtomate tiel uzuloj ne bezonos konfiguri ĝin permane. Aliaj
+enir-metodoj (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, ktp.) ankaŭ havigas similajn funkciojn kaj
+povas esti instalitaj se vi aldonis HTTP/FTP-an medion antaŭ la pakaĵa
+selekto.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">Se vi nevole preterpaŝis la enir-metodon dum la instalo, vi povas aliri ĝin
+post ŝarĝi la instalitan sistemon per "Konfiguri vian Komputilon" ->
+"Sistemo" aŭ lanĉante localdrake kiel mastrumanto.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1053642
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+      "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed  -->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Instalado/ĝisdatigo</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
+width="800" format="PNG" depth="600"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Instalado</para>
+
+      <para>Uzu tiun elekton por freŝa instalado de <application>Magejo</application> .</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Ĝisdatigu</para>
+
+      <para>Se vi havas unu aŭ pliajn ekzistantajn instalojn de
+<application>Magejo</application> en via sistemo, la instalilo ebligos vin
+ĝisdatigi unu el ili al la plej lasta versio.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon,
+sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe.  Post la strukturado de subdisko aŭ
+post la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi
+ĝin povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio
+ke vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe.  Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt
+Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>Se vi rimarkas ke vi forgesis selekti aldonan lingvon, vi povas reveni el la
+ekrano "Instalado/ĝisdatigo" al la ekrano por lingva elekto per la premo de
+<guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>.  <emphasis>Ne</emphasis> faru tion poste
+en la instalo.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..856c287b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Klavaro</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selektas adekvatan klavaron por via lingvo. Se ne estas disponebla ĝi
+aŭtomate elektos usonan klavaron.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
+align="center"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Estu certa pri tio ke la selekto estas ĝusta aŭ elektu male alian
+klavaron. Se vi ne scias kiun klavaron vi havas rigardu la specifojn kiuj
+venas kun via sistemo aŭ demandu al la vendisto. Eble estas etikedo sur la
+klavaro kiu identigas ĝin. Vi ankaŭ povas rigardi ĉi tie: <link
+xlink:href="http://eo.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono">eo.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono</link></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">Se via klavaro ne estas en la montrita listo klaku sur la butono
+<guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> por aliri etenditan liston kaj selektu vian
+klavaron tie.</para>
+
+      <para revision="1"><warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">Post elekti klavaron per la butono <guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> , vi
+revenos al la unua priklavara ekrano sed povos ŝajni kvazaŭ klavaro de tiu
+ekrano estas elektita. Vi povas sentime ignori tiun anomalion kaj daŭrigi la
+instaladon: Via klavaro estas tiu kiun vi elektis per la etendita listo.</para>
+        </warning></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">Se vi elektis klavaron nebazitan sur latinaj literoj, vi vidos aldonan
+ekranon demandantan kiel vi ŝatus ŝanĝi inter latinaj kaj nelatinaj klavaroj</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf6e03a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+       code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+       up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Bv. elekti la uzotan lingvon</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Selektu vian preferatan lingvon unue per la disfaldo de via kontinenta
+listo. <application>Magejo</application> uzos ĉi tiun selekton dum la
+instalado kaj por la instalita sistemo.</para>
+
+  <para>Se vi bezonas instali en via sistemo plurajn lingvojn por vi aŭ aliaj
+uzuloj, tiam vi devas utiligi la butonon <guibutton>Multaj lingvoj (Multiple
+languages)</guibutton> por aldoni ilin nun. Estos malfacile aldoni plian
+lingvan eltenon post la instalo.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"
+width="800" format="PNG" depth="600"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Se vi elektas pli ol unu lingvon, vi devas selekti unu el ili kiel vian
+preferatan lingvon en la komenca lingva ekrano. Ĝi markiĝos ankaŭ en la
+plurlingva ekrano .</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Se via klavara lingvo ne estas la sama kiel via preferata lingvo, tiam estas
+rekomendinde instali la lingvon de via klavaro ankaŭ.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Magejo uzas UTF-8 (Unikodon) defaŭlte. Ĉi tio povas esti malŝaltita en la
+plurlingva ekrano se vi certas pri tio ke ĝi estas neadekvata por via
+lingvo. Malŝalti unikodon havos konsekvencojn sur ĉiuj instalitaj lingvoj.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Vi povas ŝanĝi la lingvon de via sistemo post la instalo per la Kontrolilo
+de Magejo -&gt; Sistemo -&gt; Agordi skrib-sistemojn.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5ae7ff9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Selekti muson</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="selectMouse-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">Se vin ne kontentigas la funkciado de via muso, vi povas elekti iun malsaman
+ĉi tie.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Ofte, <guilabel>Universala</guilabel> - <guilabel>Ajna PS/2- kaj
+USB-musoj</guilabel> estas bona elekto.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Selektu <guilabel>Universalan</guilabel> - <guilabel>Trudi evdev</guilabel>
+por konfiguri la butonojn kiuj ne funkcias en muso kun ses aŭ pli butonoj.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d3f0fa3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+
+ 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png"
+align="center" width="800" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">Se vi preferas malsaman lanĉilan konfiguron al tiu elektita aŭtomate fare de
+la instalilo, vi povas ŝanĝi ĝin ĉi tie.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">Eble vi havas jam alian operacian sistemon en via maŝino, tiukaze vi devas
+decidi ĉu vi volas aldoni Magejon al via ekzistanta lanĉilo aŭ ebligi al
+Magejo krei novan.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa3">La grafika menuo de Magejo estas bela :)</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Uzi la lanĉilon de Magejo</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">Defaŭlte Magejo skribas novan GRUB-lanĉilon en la MBR de via unua fiksita
+disko.  Se vi jam havas aliajn operaciajn sistemojn, Magejo provos aldoni
+ilin al via nova Mageja lanĉilo.</para>
+
+    <para revision="3">Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB
+legacy and Lilo.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by
+GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is
+used.</para>
+
+      <para revision="3">The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at
+the Summary page during installation.</para>
+    </warning>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">Se vi decidas uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon tiam vi devos klaki sur la lanĉila
+butono <guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>, kiu ebligos vin ŝanĝi la
+instal-lokon de la lanĉilo.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Ne selektu aparaton kiel "sda" aŭ vi anstataŭigos la ekzistantan MBR. Vi
+devas selekti la saman radikan subdiskon kiun vi elektis dum la subdiskigo,
+ekzemple sda7.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">Klarigcele, sda estas aparato, sda7 subdisko.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Iru al tty2 per la premo de Ctrl+Alt+F2 kaj tajpu <literal>df</literal> por
+vidi kie estas via radika subdisko <literal>/</literal>. Ctrl+Alt+F7 venigos
+vin ree al la instal-ekrano.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">La ĝusta procezo por aldoni vian Magejan sistemon al ekzistanta lanĉilo
+estas preter la celo de tiu ĉi helpilo, tamen en la plimulto el la kazoj
+estos necese lanĉi lanĉilan instal-programon kiu devus detekti kaj konfiguri
+ĝin aŭtomate.  Vidu la dokumentaron por la konkreta operacia sistemo.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Lanĉila sperta elekto</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">Se vi havas tre limigitan spacon en via disko por subdisko
+<literal>/</literal> enhavanta samtempe la dosierujon
+<literal>/tmp</literal>, klaku sur <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> kaj
+aktivigu la skatolon dirantan <guilabel>Purigu /tmp dum ĉiuj
+startadoj</guilabel>. Tio helpos teni iom da libera spaco.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e37f8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title></info>
+
+	
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  
+  
+  <para>You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the
+relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen
+and editing the screen that pops up on top of it.</para>
+
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  <para>Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an
+entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one.</para>
+  <para>You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely.</para>
+  <para>The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a
+choice while booting up.</para>
+<warning><para>Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't
+just try something without knowing what you are doing.</para></warning>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..51a7f071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Konfiguri SCSI</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+       Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX kutime trovas fiksitajn diskojn senprobleme. Ĝi tamen povas ne trovi
+kelkajn malnovajn SCSI-aparatojn kaj do malsukcesi pri la instalado de la
+bezonataj peliloj.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">Se tio okazas, vi devos permane diri al Drakx kiun SCSI-aparaton vi havas.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX devus tiam esti kapabla konfiguri la aparato(j)n ĝuste.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..122889ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+    hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+    saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"
+align="center" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your
+choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every
+partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/makedoc.sh b/docs/installer/makedoc.sh
index 32e8db25..a3802cb6 100755
--- a/docs/installer/makedoc.sh
+++ b/docs/installer/makedoc.sh
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ for doc in acceptLicense addUser ask_mntpoint_s installer selectInstallClass \
   configureX_card_list configureX_monitor configureX_chooser \
   setupBootloaderAddEntry minimal-install securityLevel selectCountry media_selection add_supplemental_media; do
 
-  po4a-translate -k 50 --format docbook --master-charset utf-8 --localized-charset utf-8 \
+  po4a-translate -k 1 --format docbook --master-charset utf-8 --localized-charset utf-8 \
     --master en/${doc}.xml \
     --po $LANG.po --localized $LANG/${doc}.xml
   perl -i -p -e "s/version=\"5\.0\"/version=\"5\.0\" xml:lang=\"$LANG\"/;" $LANG/${doc}.xml
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR.po b/docs/installer/pt_BR.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9521fa5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR.po
@@ -0,0 +1,3295 @@
+# Brazilian Portuguese translation of Mageia Installer Help
+# Copyright (C) 2013 Mageia Documentation Team
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
+"Language-Team: Brazilian Portuguese <LL@li.org>\n"
+"Language: pt_BR\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32
+msgid "License and Release Notes"
+msgstr "Licenças e Notas de Lançamento"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45
+msgid "License Agreement"
+msgstr "Acordo de Licença"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
+"terms and conditions carefully."
+msgstr ""
+"Antes de instalar a <application>Mageia</application>, por favor, leia os "
+"termos e condições da licença cuidadosamente."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
+"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Estes termos e condições aplicam-se à distribuição <application>Mageia</"
+"application> toda e deve ser aceita antes para que você possa continuar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"Para aceitar, basta selecionar <guilabel>Aceitar</guilabel> e, em seguida, "
+"clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
+"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você decidir não aceitar essas condições, então agradecemos a procura. "
+"Clicando <guibutton>Sair</guibutton> irá reiniciar seu computador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68
+msgid "Release Notes"
+msgstr "Notas de Lançamento"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"Para ver o que há de novo nesta versão da <application>Mageia</application>, "
+"clique no botão <guibutton>Notas de Lançamento</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:4
+msgid "User and Superuser Management"
+msgstr "Gerenciador de Usuário e Superusuário"
+
+#.  Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+#.        changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+#.        about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+#.        disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+#.        screen), marja, 20120409
+#.  barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+#.        "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? 
+#.  JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2013-04-26 added new note 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/addUser.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:34
+msgid "Set Administrator (root)  Password:"
+msgstr "Definir senha do administrador (root):"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
+"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
+"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
+"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
+"the first password by comparing them."
+msgstr ""
+"É aconselhável para todas as instalações <application>Mageia</application> "
+"definir um superusuário e a senha do administrador, normalmente chamado a "
+"<emphasis>senha de root</emphasis> no Linux. A medida que você digite uma "
+"senha na caixa de cima, a cor de seu escudo vai mudar de vermelho para "
+"amarelo para verde, dependendo da força da senha. Um escudo verde mostra que "
+"você está usando uma senha forte. Você precisa repetir a mesma senha na "
+"caixa logo abaixo da primeira caixa de senha, verificando se você não tiver "
+"digitado corretamente a primeira senha, comparando-as."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+msgstr ""
+"Todas as senhas são \"case sensitive\" (diferenciam entre letras maiúsculas "
+"e minusculas), o melhor é usar uma mistura de letras (maiúsculas e "
+"minúsculas), números e outros caracteres em uma senha."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:56
+msgid "Enter a user"
+msgstr "Digite um usuário"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but "
+"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and "
+"anything else the average user does with his computer"
+msgstr ""
+"Adicionar um usuário aqui. Um usuário tem menos direitos do que o "
+"superusuário (root), mas o suficiente para navegar na internet, usar "
+"aplicativos de escritório ou jogar jogos e qualquer outra coisa que o "
+"usuário médio faz com o seu computador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the "
+"users icon."
+msgstr ""
+"<guibutton>Ícone</guibutton>: se você clicar neste botão irá mudar o ícone "
+"de usuários."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
+"box."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Nome real</guilabel>: Insira o nome de usuários reais na caixa de "
+"texto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
+"sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>nome de Login</guilabel>: Aqui você digita o nome de login do "
+"usuário ou deixe DrakX usar uma versão do nome do usuário real. O nome de "
+"login é \"case sensitive\"."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
+"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
+"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Senha</guilabel>: Nesta caixa de texto você deve digitar a senha "
+"do usuário. Existe um escudo no final da caixa de texto que indica a força "
+"da senha. (Veja também <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
+"password text boxes."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Senha (novamente)</guilabel>: Redigite a senha do usuário na caixa "
+"de texto e Drakx irá verificar se você digitou a mesma senha em cada uma das "
+"caixas de texto de senha do usuário."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:109
+msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:116
+msgid "Advanced User Management"
+msgstr "Gerenciamento Avançado de Usuários"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a "
+"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. "
+"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o botão <guibutton>avançado</guibutton> é clicado, é oferecido a você uma "
+"tela que permite que você edite as configurações do usuário que você está "
+"adicionando. Além disso, você pode ativar ou desativar uma conta de "
+"convidado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account "
+"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest "
+"should save his important files to a USB key."
+msgstr ""
+"Qualquer coisa que um convidado com uma conta de convidado padrão "
+"<emphasis>rbash</emphasis> salva em seu diretório <literal>/home</literal> "
+"será apagada quando ele sair. O usuário convidado deve salvar seus arquivos "
+"importantes em um pendrive USB."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a "
+"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, "
+"but he has more restricted access than normal users."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Ativar conta de convidado</guilabel>: Aqui você pode ativar ou "
+"desativar uma conta de convidado. A conta de convidado permite que um "
+"convidado acessar e usar o PC, mas ele tem acesso mais restrito do que os "
+"usuários normais."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the "
+"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are "
+"Bash, Dash and Sh"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: Esta lista suspensa permite que você altere o "
+"shell usado pelo usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior, as "
+"opções são Bash, Dash e Sh."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:144
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you "
+"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless "
+"you know what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>ID de usuário</guilabel>: Aqui você pode definir o ID de usuário "
+"para o usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior. Este é um número. "
+"Deixe em branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a "
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
+"what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>ID de Grupo</guilabel>: Isso permite que você defina o ID do "
+"grupo. Também um número, normalmente o mesmo que para o utilizador. Deixe em "
+"branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11
+msgid "Choose the mount points"
+msgstr "Escolha os pontos de montagem"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 
+#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) 
+#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes 
+#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
+#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) 
+#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountpoints-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
+"can change the mount points."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você vê as partições Linux que foram encontrados em seu computador. Se "
+"você não concorda com as sugestões do <application>DrakX</application>, você "
+"pode alterar os pontos de montagem."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
+"(root) partition."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você mudar alguma coisa, certifique-se de ainda ter uma partição "
+"<literal>/</literal> (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\", \"Type\")."
+msgstr ""
+"Cada partição é mostrada como segue: \"Dispositivo\" (\"Capacidade\", "
+"\"Ponto de montagem\", \"Tipo\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+msgstr ""
+"\"Dispositivo\", é composto de: \"disco rígido\", [\"número do disco rígido"
+"\" (letra)], \"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"sda5\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
+"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
+"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
+"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver várias partições, você pode escolher vários pontos de montagem "
+"diferentes a partir de um menu rolante (drop-down), como <literal>/</"
+"literal>, <literal>/home</literal> e <literal>/var</literal>. Você mesmo "
+"pode fazer seus próprios pontos de montagem, por exemplo <literal>/video</"
+"literal> para uma partição onde você deseja armazenar seus filmes, ou "
+"<literal>/cauldron-home</literal> para a partição <literal>/home</literal> "
+"de uma instalação caldeirão (versão da Mageia em desenvolvimento)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount "
+"point field blank."
+msgstr ""
+"Para partições que você não precisa ter acesso, você pode deixar o campo do "
+"ponto de montagem em branco."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, "
+"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen "
+"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+msgstr ""
+"Escolha a opção <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tiver certeza do "
+"que escolher, e em seguida, assinale o <guilabel>Personalização do "
+"particionamento de disco</guilabel>. Na tela seguinte você pode clicar em "
+"uma partição para ver seu tipo e tamanho."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
+"DrakX suggests, or more."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver certeza que os pontos de montagem estão corretos, clique em "
+"<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> e escolha se você só quiser formatar a(s) "
+"partição(s) que o DrakX sugere, ou mais."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:18
+msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+msgstr "DrakX, o Instalador da Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você é novo no GNU-Linux ou um usuário experiente, o Instalador da Mageia "
+"foi feito para ajudar a fazer sua instalação ou atualização tão fácil quando "
+"possível."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will "
+"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need."
+msgstr ""
+"A tela do menu inicial tem várias opções, porém a opção padrão irá iniciar o "
+"instalador, que será, normalmente, tudo o que você irá precisar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:35
+msgid "Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr "Primeira Tela da Instalação"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use "
+"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Se houver problemas durante a instalação, então pode ser necessário usar "
+"opções de instalação especiais, consulte <xref linkend=\"installationOptions"
+"\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:52
+msgid "The installation steps"
+msgstr "As etapas de instalação"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
+"on the side panel of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+"O processo de instalação é dividido em um número de passos, o que pode ser "
+"seguido no painel lateral da tela."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+msgstr ""
+"Cada passo tem uma ou mais telas que também podem ter botões "
+"<guibutton>Avançados</guibutton> com opções extras, menos comumente "
+"necessárias."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further "
+"explanations about the current step."
+msgstr ""
+"A maioria das telas tem botões de <guibutton>Ajuda</guibutton> que contém "
+"explicações sobre a etapa atual."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is "
+"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"Se em algum momento durante a instalação, você decidir interromper a "
+"instalação, é possível reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de "
+"fazer isso.  Uma vez que a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações "
+"começaram a ser instaladas, o computador não está mais no mesmo estado e "
+"reiniciar ele poderá deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar disto, "
+"você está muito certo de que reiniciar é o que você quer, vá para um "
+"terminal de texto e pressione as três teclas <guibutton> Ctrl Alt F2 </"
+"guibutton> ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, pressione <guibutton>Ctrl Alt "
+"Delete</guibutton> simultaneamente, para reiniciar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:80
+msgid "Installation options"
+msgstr "Opções de Instalação"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one "
+"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</"
+"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se a instalação falhar, então pode ser necessário tentar de novo usando uma "
+"das opções extras disponíveis pressionando <guibutton>F1 (Help)</guibutton>. "
+"Veja em <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>Tela de Ajuda da Instalação"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:87
+msgid "This will open the following text based help."
+msgstr "Isto abrirá o seguinte ajuda em modo texto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:91
+msgid "Installation Help Screen"
+msgstr "Tela de Ajuda da Instalação"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:105
+msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+msgstr "Problemas de Instalação e Possíveis Soluções"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:111
+msgid "No Graphical Interface"
+msgstr "Sem Interface Gráfica"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
+"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low "
+"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+"Após a tela inicial, você não chegou na tela de seleção de idioma.  Isto "
+"pode acontecer com algumas placas de vídeos e sistemas antigos. Tente usar "
+"uma resolução baixa teclando <code>vgalo</code> na tela de prompt (modo-"
+"texto)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
+"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
+"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se o hardware é muito antigo, uma instalação gráfica pode não ser possível. "
+"Neste caso, vale a pena tentar uma instalação em modo de texto.  Para usar "
+"esta opção, tecle ESC na primeira tela de boas-vindas e confirme com ENTER. "
+"Aparecerá para você uma tela preta com a palavra \"boot:\". Tecle \"text\" e "
+"clique ENTER. Agora continue com a instalação em modo-texto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:135
+msgid "The Install Freezes"
+msgstr "A Instalação Congela"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of "
+"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with "
+"other options as necessary."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o sistema parece congelar durante a instalação, isto pode ser um problema "
+"com a detecção de hardware. Neste caso, a detecção automática de hardware "
+"pode ser ignorada e tratada mais tarde. Para tentar desta forma, tecle "
+"<code>noauto</code> no prompt (tela modo-texto). Esta opção pode também ser "
+"combinada com outras opções, conforme necessário."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:147
+msgid "Kernel Options"
+msgstr "Opções do Kernel"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
+"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+msgstr ""
+"Estas raramente serão necessárias, mas em alguns casos, o hardware pode "
+"relatar a memória RAM disponível de forma incorreta. Para especificar isso "
+"manualmente, você pode usar o parâmetro <code>mem=xxxM</code>, onde xxx é o "
+"a correta quantidade de RAM. Por exemplo <code>mem=256M</code> irá "
+"especificar 256MB de RAM."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23
+msgid "Install or Upgrade"
+msgstr "Instalar ou atualizar"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34
+msgid "Install"
+msgstr "Instalar"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Utilize esta opção para uma nova instalação <application>Mageia</"
+"application>.  ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41
+msgid "Upgrade"
+msgstr "Atualizar"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on "
+"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the "
+"latest release."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tem uma ou mais instalações da <application>Mageia 2</application> "
+"em seu sistema, o instalador irá permitir que você atualize uma delas para a "
+"última versão."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
+"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
+"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
+"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"Se durante a instalação você decidir interromper a instalação, é possível "
+"reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de fazer isso. Uma vez que "
+"a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações começaram a ser instaladas, "
+"o computador não estará mais no mesmo estado e reiniciar ele poderia muito "
+"bem deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar isso, você está muito "
+"certo de você quer reiniciar, vá para um terminal de texto, pressione as "
+"três teclas <guilabel>Alt Ctrl F2</guilabel>, ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, "
+"pressione <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</guilabel> simultaneamente para "
+"reiniciar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
+"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você descobriu que você esqueceu de selecionar um idioma adicional, você "
+"pode retornar a partir da tela \"Instalar ou Atualizar\" para a tela de "
+"escolha de idioma pressionando <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. "
+"<emphasis>Não</emphasis> faça isso mais tarde na instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14
+msgid "Keyboard"
+msgstr "Teclado"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX seleciona um teclado adequado ao seu idioma. Se nenhum teclado "
+"adequado for encontrado, ele será o padrão para um layout de teclado dos EUA."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Certifique-se que a seleção está correta ou escolha outro layout de teclado. "
+"Se você não sabe qual o layout do seu teclado possui, procure nas "
+"especificações que acompanham o sistema ou peça ao fornecedor do computador. "
+"Pode até haver uma etiqueta no teclado que identifica o layout. Você também "
+"pode procurar aqui:<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/"
+"Keyboard_layout\">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
+"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o seu teclado não está na lista exibida, clique em <guibutton>Mais</"
+"guibutton> para obter uma lista completa, e selecionar o seu teclado lá."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
+"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
+"full list."
+msgstr ""
+"Depois de escolher um teclado a partir do diálogo <guibutton>Mais</"
+"guibutton>, você vai voltar para a primeira caixa de diálogo de escolha do "
+"teclado e vai parecer que um teclado daquela tela foi escolhido. Você pode "
+"ignorar esta anomalia e continuar a instalação: O teclado é aquele que você "
+"escolheu da lista completa."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin "
+"and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+msgstr ""
+"Se você escolher um teclado baseado em caracteres não latinos, você verá uma "
+"tela de diálogo extra perguntando como você prefere alternar entre os "
+"layouts de teclados latinos e não latinos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Services"
+msgstr "Configurar os seus serviços"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você pode definir quais serviços devem (ou não) começar quando você "
+"inicializar seu sistema."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
+"see all services in it."
+msgstr ""
+"Há quatro grupos, clique no triângulo diante de um grupo para expandi-lo e "
+"ver todos os serviços nele."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:34
+msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good."
+msgstr "A configuração escolhida pelo DrakX são geralmente boas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você selecionar um serviço, algumas informações sobre ele são mostradas "
+"na caixa de informações abaixo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:41
+msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"Apenas mude as coisas quando você sabe muito bem o que você está fazendo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23
+msgid "Please choose a language to use"
+msgstr "Por favor, escolha um idioma para usar"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during "
+"the installation and for your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+"Selecione o seu idioma preferido, pela primeira ampliação da lista para o "
+"seu continente. A <application>Mageia</application> irá utilizar essa "
+"seleção durante a instalação e para o sistema instalado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
+"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
+"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se é provável que você vai exigir vários idiomas instalado em seu sistema, "
+"para si ou para outros usuários, então você deve usar o botão "
+"<guibutton>Múltiplas linguagens</guibutton> para adicioná-los agora. Vai ser "
+"difícil adicionar o suporte a idiomas adicionais após a instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
+"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
+msgstr ""
+"Mesmo se você escolher mais de um idioma, você deve primeiro escolher um "
+"deles como seu idioma preferido na primeira tela de idiomas. Também será "
+"marcado como escolhido na tela de múltiplos idiomas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o idioma do teclado não é o mesmo que o seu idioma preferido, então é "
+"aconselhável instalar o idioma do teclado também."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the "
+"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your "
+"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages."
+msgstr ""
+"A Mageia usa UTF-8 (Unicode) por padrão. Isso pode ser desativado na tela "
+"\"múltiplas linguagens\" se você sabe que é inadequado para o seu idioma. A "
+"desativação do UTF-8 se aplicada a todos os idiomas instalados."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia "
+"Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode alterar o idioma do seu sistema após a instalação no Centro de "
+"Controle Mageia -> Sistema -> Gerenciar Localização para o seu Sistema."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4
+msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+msgstr "Confirme o disco rígido para ser formatado"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03 
+#.  test comment - johnr 
+#.  2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Clique em <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tem certeza sobre sua "
+"escolha."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
+"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+"Clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton> se você tem certeza e deseja apagar "
+"todas as partições, cada sistema operacional e todos os dados no disco "
+"rígido."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25
+msgid "Partitioning"
+msgstr "Particionamento"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the "
+"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"Nesta tela você pode ver o conteúdo do seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s) e ver as "
+"soluções que o assistente de particionamento DrakX encontrou para onde "
+"instalar <application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your "
+"particular hard drive(s) layout and content."
+msgstr ""
+"As opções disponíveis na lista abaixo irão variar, dependendo do layout e do "
+"conteúdo específicos do(s) seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" align=\"center"
+"\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45
+msgid "Use Existing Partitions"
+msgstr "Utilizar as partições existentes"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se esta opção estiver disponível, então partições existentes compatíveis com "
+"o Linux foram encontrados e podem ser utilizadas para a instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54
+msgid "Use Free Space"
+msgstr "Usar o espaço livre"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em seu disco rígido, então esta opção irá "
+"usá-lo para a sua nova instalação da Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62
+msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition"
+msgstr "Use o espaço livre na partição do Windows"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em uma partição existente do Windows, o "
+"instalador pode oferecer para usá-lo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, "
+"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all "
+"important files!"
+msgstr ""
+"Esta pode ser uma maneira útil de obter espaço para a sua nova instalação da "
+"Mageia, mas é uma operação arriscada, por isso você deve ter a certeza de "
+"ter um backup de todos os arquivos importantes!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The "
+"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to "
+"back up your personal files."
+msgstr ""
+"Note que isto envolve a redução do tamanho da partição do Windows. A "
+"partição deve ser \"limpa\", o que significa que o Windows deve ter fechado "
+"corretamente na última vez que foi usado. Deve também ter sido "
+"desfragmentado, embora isto não seja uma garantia de que todos os arquivos "
+"da partição foram movidos para fora da área que está prestes a ser usada. É "
+"altamente recomendável fazer backup de seus arquivos pessoais."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84
+msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk."
+msgstr "Apagar e utilizar o Disco Inteiro."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87
+msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia."
+msgstr "Esta opção utilizará a unidade completa para a Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90
+msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!"
+msgstr ""
+"Atenção! Esta operação apagará todos os dados do disco rígido selecionado. "
+"Tenha cuidado!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already "
+"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use "
+"this option."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você pretende utilizar parte do disco rígido para finalidade, ou você já "
+"tem dados na unidade que você não deseja perder, então não utilize esta "
+"opção."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100
+msgid "Custom"
+msgstr "Personalizado"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+"Isso lhe dará total controle sobre o local da instalação em seu(s) disco(s) "
+"rígido(s)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
+"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
+"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
+"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+msgstr ""
+"Alguns discos mais recentes, estão usando setores lógicos de 4096 bytes, ao "
+"invés do padrão anterior de 512 bytes. Em razão da indisponibilidade de "
+"hardware, o programa de particionamento usado na instalação, ainda não foi "
+"testado com discos deste tipo. Também alguns discos ssd agora utilizam um "
+"erase block com mais de 1 MB. Se você possui um disco deste tipo, sugerimos "
+"o pré-particionamento do disco, usando um programa de particionamento "
+"alternativo, tipo o gparted, e use a seguinte configuração:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117
+msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\""
+msgstr "\"Arredondar para\" \"MiB\""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119
+msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\""
+msgstr "\"Espaço livre Antes (MiB)\" \"2\""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes."
+msgstr ""
+"Certifique-se também que todas as partições tenham sido criadas com um "
+"número par de megabytes."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5
+msgid "Desktop Selection"
+msgstr "Seleção de Área de Trabalho"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
+"tune your choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Dependendo de suas seleções aqui, pode ser oferecido a você telas adicionais "
+"para ajustar as suas escolhas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package "
+"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the "
+"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button"
+msgstr ""
+"Após a(s) etapa(s) de seleção(s), você vai ver uma apresentação de slides "
+"durante a instalação dos pacotes. A apresentação de slides pode ser "
+"desativada pressionando o botão <guilabel>Detalhes</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or "
+"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full "
+"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if "
+"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the "
+"default software choices for these desktop environments. The "
+"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, "
+"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"Escolha se você prefere usar o ambiente de trabalho <application>KDE</"
+"application> ou <application>Gnome</application>. Ambos vêm com um conjunto "
+"completo de aplicações e ferramentas úteis. Marque <guilabel>Personalizar</"
+"guilabel> se você quiser usar um ou ambos, ou se você quer algo diferente do "
+"que as escolhas de software padrão para estes ambientes de desktop. O "
+"desktop <application>LXDE</application> é mais leve que os dois anteriores, "
+"ostentando colírio para os olhos e menos pacotes instalado por padrão."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4
+msgid "Package Group Selection"
+msgstr "Seleção de Grupo de Pacotes"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+msgstr ""
+"Os pacotes foram divididos em grupos, para fazer a escolha do que você "
+"precisa no seu sistema ser muito mais fácil. Os grupos são bastante "
+"autoexplicativo, no entanto, mais informações sobre o conteúdo de cada um "
+"está disponível nas dicas de ferramentas, que se tornam visíveis quando o "
+"mouse é passado sobre eles."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23
+msgid "Workstation."
+msgstr "Estação de trabalho."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27
+msgid "Server."
+msgstr "Servidor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31
+msgid "Graphical Environment."
+msgstr "Ambiente Gráfico."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
+"remove packages."
+msgstr ""
+"Seleção de Pacotes Individuais: Você pode usar esta opção para adicionar ou "
+"remover pacotes manualmente."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+msgstr ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4
+msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
+msgstr "Escolha Pacotes Individuais"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você pode adicionar ou remover quaisquer pacotes extras para "
+"personalizar a instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
+"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
+"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
+"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
+"choosing to load it."
+msgstr ""
+"Depois de ter feito a sua escolha, você pode clicar no ícone do "
+"<guibutton>disquete</guibutton>, na parte inferior da página, para salvar a "
+"sua escolha de pacotes (salvar em um pendrive USB, também). Você pode então "
+"usar este arquivo para instalar os mesmos pacotes em outro sistema, "
+"pressionando o mesmo botão durante a instalação e escolhendo a carregá-lo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:19
+msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake"
+msgstr "Personalização do particionamento de disco com DiskDrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
+"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você deseja usar a criptografia em sua partição <literal>/</literal> "
+"(raiz) você deve garantir que você tenha uma partição <literal>/boot</"
+"literal> separada. A opção de criptografia para a partição <literal>/boot</"
+"literal> NÃO deve ser feita, caso contrário, seu sistema não inicializará."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
+"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
+"is in them before you start."
+msgstr ""
+"Ajuste o layout de seu(s) disco(s) aqui. Você pode remover ou criar "
+"partições, mudar o sistema de arquivos de uma partição ou alterar o seu "
+"tamanho e até mesmo ver o que há neles antes de começar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
+"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+msgstr ""
+"Há uma aba para cada disco rígido ou outro dispositivo de armazenamento "
+"detectado, como uma chave USB. Por exemplo sda, sdb e sdc, se existem três "
+"deles."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
+"storage device"
+msgstr ""
+"Pressione <guibutton>Limpar tudo</guibutton> para limpar todas as partições "
+"no dispositivo de armazenamento selecionado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it."
+msgstr ""
+"Para todas as outras ações: clicar na partição desejada primeiro. Em "
+"seguida, visualizá-la, ou escolher um sistema de arquivos e um ponto de "
+"montagem, redimensioná-la ou limpá-la."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:49
+msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes."
+msgstr "Continue até que você ajustar tudo como desejar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:51
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready."
+msgstr "Click <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> quando estiver pronto."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:4
+msgid "Congratulations"
+msgstr "Parabéns"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text 
+#.  same day, added "s" to "sytems"
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
+"your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Você terminou de instalar e configurar a <application>Mageia</application> e "
+"agora é seguro remover a mídia de instalação e reiniciar o seu computador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
+"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+msgstr ""
+"Depois de reiniciar, você poderá escolher, na tela do gerenciador de "
+"inicialização, entre os sistemas operacionais instalados no seu computador "
+"(se você tiver mais de um)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você não ajustar as configurações no Gerenciador de Inicialização, sua "
+"instalação Mageia será automaticamente selecionada e iniciada."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:31
+msgid "Enjoy!"
+msgstr "Divirta-se!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to "
+"Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+"Visite o site www.mageia.org se você tiver dúvidas ou quiser contribuir para "
+"a Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4
+msgid "Formatting"
+msgstr "Formatação"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você pode escolher qual(s) partição(s) que deseja formatar. Quaisquer "
+"dados nas partições marcadas para formatação <emphasis>não</emphasis> serão "
+"salvos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29
+msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted"
+msgstr ""
+"Normalmente, pelo menos as partições DrakX selecionados precisam ser "
+"formatadas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to "
+"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Clique em <guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> para escolher as partições que "
+"você deseja verificar os chamados <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> "
+"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.  "
+"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você não tem certeza de ter feito a escolha certa, você pode clicar em "
+"<guibutton>Anterior</guibutton>, novamente em <guibutton>Anterior</"
+"guibutton> e, em seguida, <guibutton>Personalizar</guibutton> para voltar à "
+"tela principal. Nessa tela você pode escolher para ver o que está em suas "
+"partições."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> to continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Quando você estiver confiante em relação a seleção, clique em "
+"<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:3
+msgid "Updates"
+msgstr "Atualizações"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 30 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename
+#.  marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some "
+"packages will have been updated or improved."
+msgstr ""
+"Desde que esta versão da <application>Mageia</application> foi lançada, "
+"alguns pacotes foram atualizados ou melhorados."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, "
+"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+"Escolha <guilabel>sim</guilabel> se você deseja fazer o download e instalá-"
+"los, selecione <guilabel>não</guilabel> se você não quer fazer isso agora, "
+"ou se você não estiver conectado à Internet."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:28
+msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue"
+msgstr "Em seguida, pressione <guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:3
+msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
+msgstr "Resumo de diversos parâmetros"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 31 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! 
+#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots 
+#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+#.       the drakxid-miscellaneous section 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph 
+#.  2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. 
+#.  2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" 
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want after pressing "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX fez escolhas inteligentes para a configuração do seu sistema, "
+"dependendo das escolhas que você fez e sobre o hardware detectado pelo "
+"DrakX. Você pode verificar as configurações aqui e alterá-las se você "
+"quiser, depois de pressionar <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:45
+msgid "System parameters"
+msgstr "Parâmetros do Sistema"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:50
+msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Fuso horário</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/"
+">"
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX seleciona um fuso horário para você, dependendo de seu idioma "
+"preferido. Você pode mudá-lo se necessário. ver também <xref linkend="
+"\"configureTimezoneUTC\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:58
+msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>País / Região</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you "
+"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Se você não está no país selecionado, é muito importante que você corrija a "
+"configuração. Ver <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:67
+msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Gerenciador de Inicialização</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:69
+msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX fez boas opções para a configuração do gerenciador de inicialização."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo"
+msgstr ""
+"Não altere nada, a menos que você saiba como configurar o Grub e/ou o Lilo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:75
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:80
+msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Gerenciamento de usuário</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
+"literal> directories."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode adicionar usuários extras aqui. Cada um deles irão receber seus "
+"próprios diretórios na pasta <literal>/home</literal>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:89
+msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Serviços</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run the background "
+"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks."
+msgstr ""
+"Serviços do sistema referem-se aos pequenos programas que rodam no "
+"background (daemons). Esta ferramenta permite habilitar ou desabilitar "
+"certas tarefas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly."
+msgstr ""
+"Você deve verificar cuidadosamente antes de alterar qualquer coisa aqui - um "
+"erro pode impedir o seu computador de funcionar corretamente."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:99
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+msgstr "Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:106
+msgid "Hardware parameters"
+msgstr "Parâmetro de Hardware"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:111
+msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Teclado</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on "
+"your location, language or type of keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+"Isto é onde você configura ou altera o layout do teclado, que vai depender "
+"do seu Idioma, localização ou tipo de teclado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:119
+msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você pode adicionar ou configurar outros dispositivos apontadores, "
+"tablets, trackballs, etc"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:126
+msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Placa de Som</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the "
+"options selected will work with your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"Esta seção permite-lhe fazer o ajuste fino da sua placa de som. Na maioria "
+"dos casos, as opções selecionadas irão funcionar com seu computador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:135
+msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Interface Gráfica</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:138
+msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+msgstr ""
+"Esta secção permite-lhe configurar sua placa(s) de vídeo(s) e monitores."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:141
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+"Para mais informação, consulte <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:155
+msgid "Network and Internet parameters"
+msgstr "Parâmetros de rede e internet"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:161
+msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Rede</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media "
+"repositories."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode configurar sua rede aqui, mas para placas de rede com drivers não-"
+"livres é melhor fazer isso depois de reiniciar, no <application>Centro de "
+"Controle Mageia</application>, após ter habilitado as mídias dos "
+"repositórios não-livres."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:170
+msgid ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch "
+"that interface as well."
+msgstr ""
+"Quando você adiciona uma placa de rede, não se esqueça de configurar o seu "
+"firewall para ver aquela interface também."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:177
+msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+msgstr ""
+"Um Servidor Proxy atua como um intermediário entre o computador e a "
+"Internet.  Esta secção permite-lhe configurar o computador para utilizar um "
+"serviço proxy."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
+"need to enter here"
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode precisar consultar o seu administrador de sistemas para obter os "
+"parâmetros que você precisa inserir aqui."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:193
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Segurança"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:198
+msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Nível de Segurança</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
+"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você define o Nível de Segurança para seu computador, na maioria dos "
+"casos, a configuração padrão (Standard) é adequada para uso geral."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:205
+msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage."
+msgstr "Verifique a opção que melhor se adapta ao seu uso."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:210
+msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the "
+"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it."
+msgstr ""
+"Um firewall pretende ser uma barreira entre seus dados importantes e os "
+"patifes lá fora, na internet, que possam comprometer ou roubar eles."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your "
+"selections will depend on what you use your computer for."
+msgstr ""
+"Selecione os serviços que você deseja que tenha acesso ao seu sistema. Suas "
+"opções vão depender de para que você usa seu computador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:221
+msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky."
+msgstr ""
+"Ter em mente que permitir tudo (sem firewall) pode ser muito arriscado."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Timezone"
+msgstr "Configure o seu fuso horário"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
+"same time zone."
+msgstr ""
+"Escolha o seu fuso horário, escolha o seu país ou uma cidade próxima a você "
+"no mesmo fuso horário."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
+"GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr ""
+"Na próxima tela você pode optar por configurar seu relógio para a hora local "
+"ou GMT, também conhecida como UTC."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver mais de um sistema operacional em seu computador, certifique-"
+"se que eles estão todos configurados para a hora local, ou todos para a UTC/"
+"GMT."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+"Redimensionar partição <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"Você tem mais de uma partição do <application>Windows<superscript>®</"
+"superscript></application>. Escolha qual deve ser reduzida para dar espaço "
+"para a instalação <application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11
+msgid "Setup SCSI"
+msgstr "Detecção de disco rígido"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 
+#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) 
+#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
+"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"fail to recognise the drive."
+msgstr ""
+"O DrakX normalmente detecta discos rígidos corretamente. Pode, contudo, não "
+"detectar alguns controladores de disco SCSI antigos e, portanto, deixar de "
+"instalar os drivers necessários."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
+"you have."
+msgstr ""
+"Se isso acontecer, você terá que manualmente dizer ao Drakx qual o "
+"dispositivo(s) SCSI que você tem."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
+msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly."
+msgstr ""
+"O DrakX deve então ser capaz de configurar o dispositivo(s) corretamente."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:4
+msgid "Select mouse"
+msgstr "Selecione o mouse"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"selectMouse-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você não está feliz com a forma como o mouse responde, você pode "
+"selecionar um diferente aqui."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
+"guilabel> is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Geralmente, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - Qualquer <guilabel>mouse PS/2 "
+"ou USB</guilabel> é uma boa escolha."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to "
+"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons."
+msgstr ""
+"Selecione <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> "
+"para configurar os botões que não funcionam em um mouse com seis ou mais "
+"botões."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3
+msgid "Bootloader main options"
+msgstr "Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização"
+
+#.  2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+#.  2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
+"the installer, you can change them here."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você preferir que as configurações do gerenciador de inicialização "
+"(bootloader) sejam diferentes daquelas escolhidas automaticamente pelo "
+"instalador, você pode alterá-las aqui."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
+"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"allow Mageia to create a new one."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode já ter outro sistema operacional em sua máquina, neste caso, você "
+"precisa decidir se deseja adicionar a Mageia no seu gerenciador de "
+"inicialização existente, ou permitir que a Mageia crie um novo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26
+msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)"
+msgstr "O menu gráfico da Mageia é ótimo :)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32
+msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader"
+msgstr "Usando o Gerenciador de Inicialização da Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR "
+"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other "
+"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia "
+"boot menu."
+msgstr ""
+"Por padrão a Mageia grava um novo gerenciador de inicialização (bootlader) "
+"GRUB no MBR (Master Boot Record) do seu primeiro disco rígido. Se você já "
+"tem outros sistemas operacionais instalados, a Mageia tentará adicioná-los "
+"ao seu novo menu de inicialização."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+msgstr ""
+"A Mageia agora oferece também o GRUB2 como gerenciador de inicialização "
+"opcional, em adição ao GRUB original e Lilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+msgstr ""
+"Os sistemas Linux que utilizam o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2, "
+"atualmente não são suportados pelo GRUB (original) e não serão reconhecidos "
+"se for utilizado o GRUB padrão."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+msgstr ""
+"A melhor solução neste caso é utilizar o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2 "
+"que está disponível na página de resumo durante a instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56
+msgid "Using an existing bootloader"
+msgstr "Usando um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
+"bootloader install location."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você decidir usar um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente, então você "
+"precisa se lembrar de PARAR na página de resumo durante a instalação e "
+"clicar no botão <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton> \"Gerenciador de "
+"Inicialização\", o que permitirá que você mude o local de instalação do "
+"Gerenciador de Inicialização."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
+"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"phase earlier, e.g.  sda7."
+msgstr ""
+"Não selecione um dispositivo, por exemplo, \"sda\", ou você irá substituir "
+"sua MBR existente. Você deve selecionar a partição que você escolheu durante "
+"a fase de particionamento anterior, por exemplo: sda7."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71
+msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device."
+msgstr "Para ficar claro, sda é um dispositivo, sda7 é uma partição."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
+"the installer screen."
+msgstr ""
+"Ir para tty2 com Ctrl+Alt+F2 e tecle <literal>df</literal> para verificar "
+"onde a partição <literal>/</literal> (raiz) está.  Ctrl+Alt+F7 leva você de "
+"volta para a tela do instalador."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
+"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
+"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"question."
+msgstr ""
+"O procedimento exato para adicionar o seu sistema Mageia ao Gerenciador de "
+"Inicialização existente, está além do escopo desta ajuda, no entanto, na "
+"maioria dos casos irá envolver a execução adequado de um programa de "
+"instalação do Gerenciador de Inicialização, que deve detectá-lo e adicioná-"
+"lo automaticamente. Consulte a documentação para o sistema operacional em "
+"questão."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91
+msgid "Bootloader advanced option"
+msgstr "Opções Avançadas do Gerenciador de Inicialização"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
+"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você tiver espaço em disco muito limitado para a partição <literal>/</"
+"literal> (raiz) que contém <literal>/tmp</literal>, clique em "
+"<guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> e marque a caixa <guilabel>Limpar /tmp a "
+"cada inicialização</guilabel>. Isto ajuda a obter algum espaço livre "
+"adicional."
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "pt_BR"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:3
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr "Instalando com DrakX"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:6
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr "<note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+"Ninguém vai ver todas as telas do instalador mostradas neste manual. As "
+"telas que você verá dependem de seu hardware e as escolhas que você faz "
+"durante a instalação."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:10
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr "</note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Os textos e imagens deste manual estão disponíveis sob a licença CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://"
+"creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Este manual foi produzido com a ajuda de <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco."
+"com\">Calenco CMS</link> desenvolvido por <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc."
+"biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+"Ele foi escrito por voluntários em seu tempo livre. Entre em contato com a "
+"<link ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Equipe de "
+"Documentação</link>, se você deseja ajudar a melhorar este manual."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16
+msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+msgstr "Escolha um Servidor X (Configure sua Placa de Vídeo)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX tem um banco de dados muito completo de placas de vídeo e geralmente "
+"identifica corretamente o seu dispositivo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+msgstr ""
+"Se o instalador não detectou corretamente sua placa de vídeo e você sabe "
+"identificá-la, você pode selecioná-la a partir da árvore, escolhendo:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69
+msgid "vendor"
+msgstr "fabricante"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36
+msgid "then the name of your card"
+msgstr "em seguida, o nome de sua placa"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40
+msgid "and the type of card"
+msgstr "e o tipo de placa"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"Xorg category"
+msgstr ""
+"Se você não consegue encontrar sua placa nas listas de fabricantes (porque "
+"ainda não está no banco de dados ou é uma placa antiga), você pode encontrar "
+"um driver adequado na categoria Xorg"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
+"drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
+"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
+msgstr ""
+"A listagem Xorg fornece mais de 40 drivers de placa de vídeos genéricos e de "
+"código aberto. Se você ainda não conseguiu encontrar um driver para o sua "
+"placa, há a opção de usar o driver vesa que fornece os recursos básicos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the Commandline Interface."
+msgstr ""
+"Esteja ciente de que se você selecionar um driver incompatível você só pode "
+"ter acesso à interface de linha de comando."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some "
+"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites"
+msgstr ""
+"Alguns fabricantes de placas de vídeo oferecem drivers proprietários para "
+"Linux, que só podem estar disponíveis nos repositórios Non-free ou Tainted "
+"e, em alguns casos, apenas nos sites dos fabricantes de placas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to "
+"access them, you should do this after your first reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"Os respositórios Non-free e Tainted precisam ser explicitamente habilitados "
+"para acessá-los, você deve fazer isso após o primeiro reinício."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18
+msgid "Choosing your Monitor"
+msgstr "Escolhendo seu Monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX tem um banco de dados bastante extenso de monitores e geralmente "
+"identificará corretamente o seu."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage "
+"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing "
+"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor "
+"documentation"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Selecionando um monitor com características diferentes pode "
+"danificar seu equipamento de vídeo. Por favor não tente algo sem "
+"conhecimento do que você está fazendo. </emphasis>Se você tiver dúvidas, "
+"consulte a documentação de seu monitor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
+msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Personalizado</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+msgstr ""
+"Esta opção permite você definir dois parâmetros importantes, a taxa de "
+"atualização vertical e da taxa de sicronização horizontal. A atualização "
+"vertical determina a frequência que a tela será atualizada e a sicronização "
+"horizontal é a taxa de linhas que serão exibidas."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+"É <emphasis>MUITO IMPORTANTE</emphasis> que você não especifique um tipo de "
+"monitor com uma gama de sincronização que está além das capacidades do seu "
+"equipamento: você pode danificá-lo. Em caso de dúvidas, escolha uma "
+"configuração conservadora e consulte a documentação de seu monitor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55
+msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
+"monitor database."
+msgstr ""
+"É a opção padrão e tenta determinar o tipo de monitor no banco de dados."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63
+msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Fabricante</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:"
+msgstr ""
+"Se o instalador não detectou corretamente o seu monitor e você sabe "
+"identificá-lo, você pode selecioná-lo a partir da árvore, escolhendo:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73
+msgid "the monitor manufacturers name"
+msgstr "o nome do fabricante do monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77
+msgid "the monitor description"
+msgstr "a descrição do monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82
+msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
+"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
+"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
+"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+msgstr ""
+"A seleção deste grupo apresenta cerca de 30 configurações de tela, tal como "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz, incluindo as telas planas como as usadas em laptops. Esta é "
+"frequentemente uma boa opção de seleção de grupo de monitor, se você usa o "
+"driver da placa Vesa, quando seu equipamento de vídeo não é identificado "
+"automaticamente.  Mais uma vez, pode ser ser sábio ser cauteloso em suas "
+"seleções."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4
+msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
+msgstr "Configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor"
+
+#.  Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
+"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
+"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
+"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
+"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
+"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
+"think the choice is incorrect."
+msgstr ""
+"Não importa qual ambiente gráfico (também conhecido como ambiente de "
+"desktop) que você escolheu para esta instalação da <application>Mageia</"
+"application>, eles são todos baseados em um sistema de interface gráfica de "
+"usuário chamada <acronym>X Window System</acronym>, ou simplesmente "
+"<acronym>X</acronym>. Então, para <acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</"
+"acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> ou qualquer outro ambiente gráfico "
+"funcionar bem, as configurações de <acronym>X</acronym> a seguir precisam "
+"ser corretas. Escolha as configurações corretas, se você pode ver que o "
+"<application>DrakX</application> não fazer uma escolha, ou se você acha que "
+"a escolha é incorreta."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card "
+"from the list if needed."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Placa de Vídeo</guibutton></emphasis>: Escolha a sua "
+"placa da lista, se necessário.."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor "
+"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. "
+"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the "
+"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: Você pode escolher "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> quando aplicável, ou escolher o seu monitor "
+"a partir da lista de <guilabel>Fornecedores</guilabel> ou "
+"<guilabel>Genéricos</guilabel>. Escolha <guilabel>Personalizar</guilabel> se "
+"você preferir definir manualmente as taxas de atualização horizontal e "
+"vertical do seu monitor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45
+msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor"
+msgstr "Taxas de atualização incorreta pode danificar o seu monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
+"resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolução</guibutton></emphasis>: Defina aqui a "
+"resolução e profundidade de cor desejada de seu monitor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
+"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
+"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
+"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
+"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Teste</guibutton></emphasis>: O botão de teste nem "
+"sempre aparece durante a instalação. Se o botão está lá, você pode controlar "
+"suas configurações pressionando-a. Se você ver uma indagação perguntando se "
+"suas configurações estão corretas, você pode responder \"sim\", e as "
+"configurações serão mantidas. Se você não vê nada, você vai voltar para a "
+"tela de configuração e ser capaz de reconfigurar tudo até o teste ficar bom. "
+"<emphasis>Certifique-se de que suas configurações estejam da forma mais "
+"segura, caso o botão de teste não esteja disponível</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
+"enable or disable various options."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Opções</guibutton></emphasis>: Aqui você pode optar por "
+"ativar ou desativar várias opções."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5
+msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+msgstr "Adicionando ou Modificando uma Entrada do Menu de Inicialização"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the "
+"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen "
+"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode adicionar uma entrada ou modificar a que você selecionar primeiro, "
+"pressionando o botão correspondente na janela de <emphasis>Configuração do "
+"Menu de Inicialização</emphasis> e editando a janela que abrir em cima dela."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an "
+"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one."
+msgstr ""
+"Algumas coisas que podem ser feitas sem qualquer risco são, mudar o rótulo "
+"de uma entrada e selecionar a caixa de uma entrada para torná-la padrão."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode adicionar o número da versão correta de uma entrada, ou renomeá-la "
+"completamente."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a "
+"choice while booting up."
+msgstr ""
+"A entrada padrão vai inicializar o sistema se você não fizer uma escolha "
+"durante a inicialização."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't "
+"just try something without knowing what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"Editar outras coisas pode fazer com que o sistema não inicie. Por favor, não "
+"tente algo sem saber o que está fazendo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:3
+msgid "Minimal Install"
+msgstr "Instalação Mínima"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Você pode escolher uma instalação mínima desmarcando todas as seleções na "
+"tela Seleção do Grupo de Pacotes, ver <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups"
+"\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised "
+"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package "
+"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"A instalação mínima é destinado para aqueles com usos específicos em mente "
+"para sua <application>Mageia</application>, como um servidor ou estação de "
+"trabalho especializado. Você provavelmente irá utilizar esta opção, "
+"combinada com a seleção manual de pacotes, ver <xref linkend="
+"\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer "
+"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você escolher esta classe de instalação, em seguida, a próxima tela irá "
+"oferecer-lhe alguns pacotes extras úteis para instalar, tais como a "
+"documentação e o X."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:12
+msgid "Security Level"
+msgstr "Nível de Segurança"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:24
+msgid "You can adjust your security level here."
+msgstr "Você pode ajustar o seu nível de segurança aqui."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose."
+msgstr ""
+"Deixe as configurações padrão como estão, se você não sabe o que escolher."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings "
+"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center."
+msgstr ""
+"Após a instalação, sempre será possível ajustar as configurações de "
+"segurança na aba <guilabel>Segurança</guilabel> do Centro de Controle Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:13
+msgid "Select your Country / Region"
+msgstr "Selecione seu país / região"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network."
+msgstr ""
+"Selecione seu país ou região. Isso é importante para todos os tipos de "
+"configurações, como a moeda e domínio regulador do wireless. Definir o país "
+"errado pode levar a não ser capaz de usar uma rede sem fio."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
+"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o seu país não está na lista, clique no botão <guilabel>Outros Países</"
+"guilabel> e escolha seu país / região lá."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, "
+"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the "
+"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Se o seu país está apenas na lista <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel>, "
+"depois de clicar <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pode parecer um país de uma "
+"primeira lista foi escolhida. Por favor, ignore isso, o DrakX seguirá sua "
+"escolha real."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:46
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr "Método de entrada"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
+"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
+"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+msgstr ""
+"Na tela <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel> você também pode selecionar um "
+"método de entrada (na parte inferior da lista). Métodos de entrada permitem "
+"a entrada de caracteres multilíngues (chinês, japonês, coreano, etc). IBus é "
+"o método de entrada padrão nos DVDs e nos live-CDs da Mageia para a África/"
+"Índia e Ásia/no-Índia. Para idiomas asiáticos e africanos, o IBus será "
+"definido como método de entrada padrão para que os usuários não precisem "
+"configurá-lo manualmente. Outros métodos de entrada (SCIM, gcin, HIME, etc) "
+"também oferecem funções semelhantes e podem ser instalados se você adicionou "
+"as mídias HTTP/FTP antes da seleção do pacote."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -&gt; "
+"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Se você perdeu a configuração do método de entrada durante a instalação, "
+"você pode acessá-lo depois de inicializar o sistema instalado, acessando "
+"\"Configure seu Computador\" -> \"Sistema\", ou executando localedrake "
+"(gerenciador de localização/idiomas) como root."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:3
+msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
+msgstr "Seleção de Mídia (Nonfree)"
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+"Aqui você tem uma lista dos repositórios disponíveis. Nem todos os "
+"repositórios estarão disponíveis, dependendo do tipo de mídia que você "
+"estiver usando para a instalação. A seleção do repositório determinará quais "
+"pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção durante os próximos passos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+msgstr ""
+"O repositório <emphasis>Core</emphasis> não pode ser desabilitado uma vez "
+"que ele contém a base da distribuição."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+msgstr ""
+"O repositório <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> inclui pacotes que são "
+"gratuitos, ou seja, a Mageia pode redistribuí-los, mas eles contêm código-"
+"fonte fechado (daí o nome - Nonfree). Por exemplo, este repositório inclui "
+"drivers proprietários para placas de vídeo nVidia e ATI, firmware para "
+"várias placas WiFi, etc."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+msgstr ""
+"O repositório <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> inclui pacotes distribuídos sob "
+"licença livre. O principal critério para colocar pacotes neste repositório é "
+"que eles podem infringir patentes e leis de direitos autorais em alguns "
+"países, por exemplo, codecs multimídia necessários para reproduzir vários "
+"arquivos de áudio/video; pacotes necessários para reproduzir DVD de vídeo "
+"comercial, etc."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10
+msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
+msgstr "Seleção de Mídia (Configurar a Instalação de Mídias Suplementares )"
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
+"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"during the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+"Esta tela lista os repositórios reconhecidos automaticamente. Você pode "
+"adicionar outras fontes de pacotes, como um CD-ROM ou uma fonte remota.  A "
+"fonte selecionada determina quais pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção "
+"durante os próximos passos."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29
+msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+msgstr "Para instalação via rede, siga os seguintes passos:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33
+msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up."
+msgstr "Escolha e ativação da rede, caso não esteja disponível."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With "
+"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+"selecione um mirror ou especifique uma URL (a primeira opção). Selecionando "
+"um mirror, você tem acesso a todos os repositórios gerenciados pela Mageia, "
+"como os repositórios non-freee, tainted e updates.  Informando uma URL, você "
+"pode selecionar um repositório específico ou seu próprio compartilhamento "
+"NFS de instalação."
+
+#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Escolha de disco rígido para apagar para <application>Mageia</application>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install "
+#~ "<application>Mageia</application>."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Selecione o disco rígido que deve ser formatado para instalar a "
+#~ "<application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk "
+#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Certifique-se de selecionar o disco rígido correto. Todos os dados no "
+#~ "disco selecionado serão perdidos. Esta etapa não poderá ser desfeita."
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)"
+#~ msgstr "Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização (velha página)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main "
+#~ "options''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "that is the page the help button for this screen links to."
+
+#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Configure o X, configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor (velha página)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card "
+#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because the help button for this screen links to that file."
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use"
+#~ msgstr "Uso especializado do Gerenciador de Inicialização"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/"
+#~ "> first."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se você não tiver feito isso ainda, por favor leia <xref linkend="
+#~ "\"setupBootloader\"/> primeiro."
+
+#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually"
+#~ msgstr "Adicionando manualmente um sistema baseado no GRUB2"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Um sistema baseado no GRUB2 pode ser adicionados ao menu de inicialização "
+#~ "da Mageia como segue:"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version "
+#~ "run the following command in a terminal:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Inicializar o sistema em questão. A fim de determinar a versão GRUB2, "
+#~ "executar o seguinte comando em um terminal:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "or if that fails try:"
+#~ msgstr "ou se isso falhar, tentar:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom "
+#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 "
+#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during "
+#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se este retorna \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possivelmente com um sufixo "
+#~ "personalizado), então ele está usando o GRUB (também chamado GRUB legacy) "
+#~ "e não o GRUB2 e o seu sistema deve ser corretamente identificado pela "
+#~ "Mageia durante a instalação e acrescentado automaticamente no menu."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se este comando retornar (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 ou 2.xx, então você está "
+#~ "usando GRUB2."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root "
+#~ "partition:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Anote a versão e digite este comando para identificar a partição root:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "This will output something like :"
+#~ msgstr "A saída será algo como:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it."
+#~ msgstr "sdb11 é a partição raiz - anote isto."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the "
+#~ "following command:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Agora, verifique se a pasta /boot está na mesma partição, digitando o "
+#~ "seguinte comando:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a "
+#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu."
+#~ "lst below."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se a partição /boot é diferente da partição raiz, então, anote e use a "
+#~ "partição /boot na linha \"root\" ao editar o menu.lst abaixo."
+
+#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia."
+#~ msgstr "Agora você pode desligar o sistema e instalar a Mageia"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the "
+#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Em seu novo sistema Mageia em execução, abra um terminal e, como root, "
+#~ "edite o arquivo /boot/grub/menu.lst como segue:"
+
+#~ msgid "To become root use:"
+#~ msgstr "Para tornar-se root use:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(enter root password)"
+#~ msgstr "(enter root password)"
+
+#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:"
+#~ msgstr "Para abrir o arquivo em um editor, use:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "(substituir \"kwrite\" por \"gedit\" se você estiver usando o Gnome)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the "
+#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on "
+#~ "its position in the file:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Adicione a seguinte entrada (por exemplo, Ubuntu) para o seu sistema , "
+#~ "possivelmente como a segunda estrofe. A posição que o item aparece no "
+#~ "menu dependerá da sua posição no arquivo:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" "
+#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy "
+#~ "GRUB count from zero."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Na segunda linha, \"hd1\" significa o segundo disco rígido, o \"10\" "
+#~ "indica a 11ª partição. Unidades e partições no GRUB legacy da Mageia "
+#~ "conta-se a partir do zero."
+
+#~ msgid "Therefore:"
+#~ msgstr "Portanto:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :"
+#~ msgstr "Se a versão GRUB2 é 2.xx, então mudar a última linha para:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub"
+#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se você precisou usar \"grub2-install\" antes, então, mudar <literal>"
+#~ "\"grub\"</literal> para <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> na última linha."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</"
+#~ "literal> from the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se /boot estava em uma partição separada, então, remova <literal>\"/boot"
+#~ "\"</literal> da última linha."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in "
+#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Salve o arquivo e reinicie. Agora você deve ver a entrada do seu \"Ubuntu"
+#~ "\" no menu e ser capaz de iniciar a partir dele."
+
+#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader"
+#~ msgstr "Usando um gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2 existente"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader "
+#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Se você não leu ainda a parte geral sobre como utilizar um gerenciador de "
+#~ "inicialização existente, então, faça isso agora. Consulte <xref linkend="
+#~ "\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some "
+#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding "
+#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details "
+#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the "
+#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Existe um bug conhecido no OS-prober (usado durante a instalação do "
+#~ "GRUB2, em algumas versões do Debian/Ubuntu), que cria incorretamente grub."
+#~ "cfg ao adicionar o sistema Mageia (ou Mandriva). Isto é simples de "
+#~ "resolver e os detalhes da solução podem ser encontrados no Fórum Mageia "
+#~ "(en). Pesquise por \"prober\", o tema é \"grub problem\", o post #9 tem "
+#~ "as informações."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel "
+#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub."
+#~ "d/40_custom</literal>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Para tornar a correção permanente, de modo que sobreviva a uma "
+#~ "atualização de kernel do Ubuntu, a entrada Mageia deve ser adicionada à "
+#~ "<literal>/etc/grub.d/40_custom</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. "
+#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the "
+#~ "preferred solution."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Notícia recente: O bug foi corrigido no os-prober-1.53, lançado em 08 de "
+#~ "maio de 2012. Então, agora a atualização para a nova versão da sua "
+#~ "instalação GRUB2 é a melhor solução."
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5dc2fdee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <title>Instalando com DrakX</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>Ninguém vai ver todas as telas do instalador mostradas neste manual. As
+telas que você verá dependem de seu hardware e as escolhas que você faz
+durante a instalação.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para>Os textos e imagens deste manual estão disponíveis sob a licença CC BY-SA
+3.0 <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>Este manual foi produzido com a ajuda de <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> desenvolvido por <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>Ele foi escrito por voluntários em seu tempo livre. Entre em contato com a
+<link ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Equipe de
+Documentação</link>, se você deseja ajudar a melhorar este manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+
+
+  
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+ 
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  
+<!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ -->
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..13081316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="acceptLicense"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+       http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html  -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+       but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( 
+       ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not 
+       sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR  2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">Licenças e Notas de Lançamento</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-license.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="license">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="license-ti1">Acordo de Licença</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Antes de instalar a <application>Mageia</application>, por favor, leia os
+termos e condições da licença cuidadosamente.</para>
+
+    <para>Estes termos e condições aplicam-se à distribuição
+<application>Mageia</application> toda e deve ser aceita antes para que você
+possa continuar.</para>
+
+    <para>Para aceitar, basta selecionar <guilabel>Aceitar</guilabel> e, em seguida,
+clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para>Se você decidir não aceitar essas condições, então agradecemos a
+procura. Clicando <guibutton>Sair</guibutton> irá reiniciar seu computador.</para>
+
+    
+  <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+       marja, 20120405  -->
+</section>
+
+  <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+    <!--
+  <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Notas de Lançamento</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+    <para>Para ver o que há de novo nesta versão da <application>Mageia</application>,
+clique no botão <guibutton>Notas de Lançamento</guibutton>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..58831604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">Gerenciador de Usuário e Superusuário</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+       changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+       about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+       disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+       screen), marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+       "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="root-password">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Definir senha do administrador (root):</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>É aconselhável para todas as instalações <application>Mageia</application>
+definir um superusuário e a senha do administrador, normalmente chamado a
+<emphasis>senha de root</emphasis> no Linux. A medida que você digite uma
+senha na caixa de cima, a cor de seu escudo vai mudar de vermelho para
+amarelo para verde, dependendo da força da senha. Um escudo verde mostra que
+você está usando uma senha forte. Você precisa repetir a mesma senha na
+caixa logo abaixo da primeira caixa de senha, verificando se você não tiver
+digitado corretamente a primeira senha, comparando-as.</para>
+
+    <note xml:id="givePassword">
+      <para>Todas as senhas são "case sensitive" (diferenciam entre letras maiúsculas e
+minusculas), o melhor é usar uma mistura de letras (maiúsculas e
+minúsculas), números e outros caracteres em uma senha.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="enterUser">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Digite um usuário</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Adicionar um usuário aqui. Um usuário tem menos direitos do que o
+superusuário (root), mas o suficiente para navegar na internet, usar
+aplicativos de escritório ou jogar jogos e qualquer outra coisa que o
+usuário médio faz com o seu computador.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Ícone</guibutton>: se você clicar neste botão irá mudar o ícone
+de usuários.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Nome real</guilabel>: Insira o nome de usuários reais na caixa de
+texto.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>nome de Login</guilabel>: Aqui você digita o nome de login do
+usuário ou deixe DrakX usar uma versão do nome do usuário real. O nome de
+login é "case sensitive".</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Senha</guilabel>: Nesta caixa de texto você deve digitar a senha
+do usuário. Existe um escudo no final da caixa de texto que indica a força
+da senha. (Veja também <xref linkend="givePassword"></xref>)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Senha (novamente)</guilabel>: Redigite a senha do usuário na caixa
+de texto e Drakx irá verificar se você digitou a mesma senha em cada uma das
+caixas de texto de senha do usuário.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+   <note>
+      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but
+write protected) home directory.</para>
+
+      <para>However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC -
+System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected.</para>
+
+      <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised
+to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para>
+
+      <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all
+extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step
+during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+      <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para>
+   </note>
+
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Gerenciamento Avançado de Usuários</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Se o botão <guibutton>avançado</guibutton> é clicado, é oferecido a você uma
+tela que permite que você edite as configurações do usuário que você está
+adicionando. Além disso, você pode ativar ou desativar uma conta de
+convidado.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para>Qualquer coisa que um convidado com uma conta de convidado padrão
+<emphasis>rbash</emphasis> salva em seu diretório <literal>/home</literal>
+será apagada quando ele sair. O usuário convidado deve salvar seus arquivos
+importantes em um pendrive USB.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Ativar conta de convidado</guilabel>: Aqui você pode ativar ou
+desativar uma conta de convidado. A conta de convidado permite que um
+convidado acessar e usar o PC, mas ele tem acesso mais restrito do que os
+usuários normais.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: Esta lista suspensa permite que você altere o
+shell usado pelo usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior, as
+opções são Bash, Dash e Sh.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>ID de usuário</guilabel>: Aqui você pode definir o ID de usuário
+para o usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior. Este é um
+número. Deixe em branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>ID de Grupo</guilabel>: Isso permite que você defina o ID do
+grupo. Também um número, normalmente o mesmo que para o utilizador. Deixe em
+branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..860f55b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Seleção de Mídia (Configurar a Instalação de Mídias Suplementares )</title>
+    </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Esta tela lista os repositórios reconhecidos automaticamente. Você pode
+adicionar outras fontes de pacotes, como um CD-ROM ou uma fonte remota.  A
+fonte selecionada determina quais pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção
+durante os próximos passos.</para>
+
+  <para>Para instalação via rede, siga os seguintes passos:</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Escolha e ativação da rede, caso não esteja disponível. </para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>selecione um mirror ou especifique uma URL (a primeira opção). Selecionando
+um mirror, você tem acesso a todos os repositórios gerenciados pela Mageia,
+como os repositórios non-freee, tainted e updates.  Informando uma URL, você
+pode selecionar um repositório específico ou seu próprio compartilhamento
+NFS de instalação.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0657359a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Escolha os pontos de montagem</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+       with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+       write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="chooseMountpoints-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Aqui você vê as partições Linux que foram encontrados em seu computador. Se
+você não concorda com as sugestões do <application>DrakX</application>, você
+pode alterar os pontos de montagem.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Se você mudar alguma coisa, certifique-se de ainda ter uma partição
+<literal>/</literal> (root).</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Cada partição é mostrada como segue: "Dispositivo" ("Capacidade", "Ponto de
+montagem", "Tipo").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>"Dispositivo", é composto de: "disco rígido", ["número do disco rígido"
+(letra)], "número da partição" (por exemplo, "sda5").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Se você tiver várias partições, você pode escolher vários pontos de montagem
+diferentes a partir de um menu rolante (drop-down), como
+<literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> e
+<literal>/var</literal>. Você mesmo pode fazer seus próprios pontos de
+montagem, por exemplo <literal>/video</literal> para uma partição onde você
+deseja armazenar seus filmes, ou <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> para a
+partição <literal>/home</literal> de uma instalação caldeirão (versão da
+Mageia em desenvolvimento).</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Para partições que você não precisa ter acesso, você pode deixar o campo do
+ponto de montagem em branco.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Escolha a opção <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tiver certeza do
+que escolher, e em seguida, assinale o <guilabel>Personalização do
+particionamento de disco</guilabel>. Na tela seguinte você pode clicar em
+uma partição para ver seu tipo e tamanho.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>Se você tiver certeza que os pontos de montagem estão corretos, clique em
+<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> e escolha se você só quiser formatar a(s)
+partição(s) que o DrakX sugere, ou mais.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..26249bc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="chooseDesktop">
+
+
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Seleção de Área de Trabalho</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+
+
+    <para>Dependendo de suas seleções aqui, pode ser oferecido a você telas adicionais
+para ajustar as suas escolhas.</para>
+
+    <para>Após a(s) etapa(s) de seleção(s), você vai ver uma apresentação de slides
+durante a instalação dos pacotes. A apresentação de slides pode ser
+desativada pressionando o botão <guilabel>Detalhes</guilabel>.</para>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Escolha se você prefere usar o ambiente de trabalho
+<application>KDE</application> ou <application>Gnome</application>. Ambos
+vêm com um conjunto completo de aplicações e ferramentas úteis. Marque
+<guilabel>Personalizar</guilabel> se você quiser usar um ou ambos, ou se
+você quer algo diferente do que as escolhas de software padrão para estes
+ambientes de desktop. O desktop <application>LXDE</application> é mais leve
+que os dois anteriores, ostentando colírio para os olhos e menos pacotes
+instalado por padrão.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..de0eed6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="choosePackageGroups">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Seleção de Grupo de Pacotes</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Os pacotes foram divididos em grupos, para fazer a escolha do que você
+precisa no seu sistema ser muito mais fácil. Os grupos são bastante
+autoexplicativo, no entanto, mais informações sobre o conteúdo de cada um
+está disponível nas dicas de ferramentas, que se tornam visíveis quando o
+mouse é passado sobre eles.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Estação de trabalho.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Servidor.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Ambiente Gráfico.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Seleção de Pacotes Individuais: Você pode usar esta opção para adicionar ou
+remover pacotes manualmente.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install.</para> 
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e77d0bf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Escolha Pacotes Individuais</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Aqui você pode adicionar ou remover quaisquer pacotes extras para
+personalizar a instalação.</para>
+
+    <para>Depois de ter feito a sua escolha, você pode clicar no ícone do
+<guibutton>disquete</guibutton>, na parte inferior da página, para salvar a
+sua escolha de pacotes (salvar em um pendrive USB, também). Você pode então
+usar este arquivo para instalar os mesmos pacotes em outro sistema,
+pressionando o mesmo botão durante a instalação e escolhendo a carregá-lo.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8a1691a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configurar os seus serviços</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Aqui você pode definir quais serviços devem (ou não) começar quando você
+inicializar seu sistema.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">Há quatro grupos, clique no triângulo diante de um grupo para expandi-lo e
+ver todos os serviços nele.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">A configuração escolhida pelo DrakX são geralmente boas.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">Se você selecionar um serviço, algumas informações sobre ele são mostradas
+na caixa de informações abaixo.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Apenas mude as coisas quando você sabe muito bem o que você está fazendo.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d1fe283b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure o seu fuso horário</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Escolha o seu fuso horário, escolha o seu país ou uma cidade próxima a você
+no mesmo fuso horário.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">Na próxima tela você pode optar por configurar seu relógio para a hora local
+ou GMT, também conhecida como UTC.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">Se você tiver mais de um sistema operacional em seu computador,
+certifique-se que eles estão todos configurados para a hora local, ou todos
+para a UTC/GMT.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3c9ed92b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" 
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" 
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" 
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" 
+xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" 
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof  -->
+<!-- lproof  -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Escolha um Servidor X (Configure sua Placa de Vídeo)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
+format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>DrakX tem um banco de dados muito completo de placas de vídeo e geralmente
+identifica corretamente o seu dispositivo.</para>
+  
+  <para>Se o instalador não detectou corretamente sua placa de vídeo e você sabe
+identificá-la, você pode selecioná-la a partir da árvore, escolhendo:
+    
+  <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>fabricante</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>em seguida, o nome de sua placa</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>e o tipo de placa</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>Se você não consegue encontrar sua placa nas listas de fabricantes (porque
+ainda não está no banco de dados ou é uma placa antiga), você pode encontrar
+um driver adequado na categoria Xorg</para>
+  
+  <para>A listagem Xorg fornece mais de 40 drivers de placa de vídeos genéricos e de
+código aberto. Se você ainda não conseguiu encontrar um driver para o sua
+placa, há a opção de usar o driver vesa que fornece os recursos básicos.</para>
+	
+  <para>Esteja ciente de que se você selecionar um driver incompatível você só pode
+ter acesso à interface de linha de comando.</para>
+	
+
+  <para>Alguns fabricantes de placas de vídeo oferecem drivers proprietários para
+Linux, que só podem estar disponíveis nos repositórios Non-free ou Tainted
+e, em alguns casos, apenas nos sites dos fabricantes de placas. </para>
+	
+  <para>Os respositórios Non-free e Tainted precisam ser explicitamente habilitados
+para acessá-los, você deve fazer isso após o primeiro reinício.</para>
+	
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..51984553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">Não importa qual ambiente gráfico (também conhecido como ambiente de
+desktop) que você escolheu para esta instalação da
+<application>Mageia</application>, eles são todos baseados em um sistema de
+interface gráfica de usuário chamada <acronym>X Window System</acronym>, ou
+simplesmente <acronym>X</acronym>. Então, para <acronym>KDE</acronym>,
+<acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> ou qualquer outro ambiente
+gráfico funcionar bem, as configurações de <acronym>X</acronym> a seguir
+precisam ser corretas. Escolha as configurações corretas, se você pode ver
+que o <application>DrakX</application> não fazer uma escolha, ou se você
+acha que a escolha é incorreta.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Placa de Vídeo</guibutton></emphasis>: Escolha a sua
+placa da lista, se necessário..</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: Você pode escolher
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> quando aplicável, ou escolher o seu monitor
+a partir da lista de <guilabel>Fornecedores</guilabel> ou
+<guilabel>Genéricos</guilabel>. Escolha <guilabel>Personalizar</guilabel> se
+você preferir definir manualmente as taxas de atualização horizontal e
+vertical do seu monitor.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Taxas de atualização incorreta pode danificar o seu monitor</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolução</guibutton></emphasis>: Defina aqui a
+resolução e profundidade de cor desejada de seu monitor.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Teste</guibutton></emphasis>: O botão de teste nem
+sempre aparece durante a instalação. Se o botão está lá, você pode controlar
+suas configurações pressionando-a. Se você ver uma indagação perguntando se
+suas configurações estão corretas, você pode responder "sim", e as
+configurações serão mantidas. Se você não vê nada, você vai voltar para a
+tela de configuração e ser capaz de reconfigurar tudo até o teste ficar
+bom. <emphasis>Certifique-se de que suas configurações estejam da forma mais
+segura, caso o botão de teste não esteja disponível</emphasis>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Opções</guibutton></emphasis>: Aqui você pode optar por
+ativar ou desativar várias opções.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..46c02add
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Escolhendo seu Monitor</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX tem um banco de dados bastante extenso de monitores e geralmente
+identificará corretamente o seu.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecionando um monitor com características diferentes pode
+danificar seu equipamento de vídeo. Por favor não tente algo sem
+conhecimento do que você está fazendo. </emphasis>Se você tiver dúvidas,
+consulte a documentação de seu monitor.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Personalizado</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">Esta opção permite você definir dois parâmetros importantes, a taxa de
+atualização vertical e da taxa de sicronização horizontal. A atualização
+vertical determina a frequência que a tela será atualizada e a sicronização
+horizontal é a taxa de linhas que serão exibidas.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">É <emphasis>MUITO IMPORTANTE</emphasis> que você não especifique um tipo de
+monitor com uma gama de sincronização que está além das capacidades do seu
+equipamento: você pode danificá-lo. Em caso de dúvidas, escolha uma
+configuração conservadora e consulte a documentação de seu monitor.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">É a opção padrão e tenta determinar o tipo de monitor no banco de dados.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Fabricante</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">Se o instalador não detectou corretamente o seu monitor e você sabe
+identificá-lo, você pode selecioná-lo a partir da árvore, escolhendo: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>fabricante</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>o nome do fabricante do monitor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>a descrição do monitor</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">A seleção deste grupo apresenta cerca de 30 configurações de tela, tal como
+1024x768 @ 60Hz, incluindo as telas planas como as usadas em laptops. Esta é
+frequentemente uma boa opção de seleção de grupo de monitor, se você usa o
+driver da placa Vesa, quando seu equipamento de vídeo não é identificado
+automaticamente.  Mais uma vez, pode ser ser sábio ser cauteloso em suas
+seleções.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3c73374c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="diskdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+	
+	
+	
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on
+    any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on
+      your <literal>
+/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root 
+      Also added some text. -->
+<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs-->
+<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Personalização do particionamento de disco com DiskDrake</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png" align="center">
+</imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+<warning>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">Se você deseja usar a criptografia em sua partição <literal>/</literal>
+(raiz) você deve garantir que você tenha uma partição
+<literal>/boot</literal> separada. A opção de criptografia para a partição
+<literal>/boot</literal> NÃO deve ser feita, caso contrário, seu sistema não
+inicializará.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Ajuste o layout de seu(s) disco(s) aqui. Você pode remover ou criar
+partições, mudar o sistema de arquivos de uma partição ou alterar o seu
+tamanho e até mesmo ver o que há neles antes de começar.
+ </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">Há uma aba para cada disco rígido ou outro dispositivo de armazenamento
+detectado, como uma chave USB. Por exemplo sda, sdb e sdc, se existem três
+deles.
+  </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Pressione <guibutton>Limpar tudo</guibutton> para limpar todas as partições
+no dispositivo de armazenamento selecionado.</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">Para todas as outras ações: clicar na partição desejada primeiro. Em
+seguida, visualizá-la, ou escolher um sistema de arquivos e um ponto de
+montagem, redimensioná-la ou limpá-la.</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue até que você ajustar tudo como desejar. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7">Click <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> quando estiver pronto.</para> </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..09d72e42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-20 Yes I agree with Lebarhon - reference to home partition removed -->
+<!-- Simonnzg - doing anything to a Windows partition is DANGEROUS. I would prefer 
+       if this was not an option, but... -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 put the para xml id's back.  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-29 changed text as discussed on the ml and with papoteur's approval
+ lebarhon: 2012-08-18 warning added-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 changed warning to text suggested by Dave Hodgings in bug 9594 -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by obgr_seneca -->
+<!-- lebarhon 2013-04-11 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by Dave Hodgins/Marja-->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Particionamento</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">Nesta tela você pode ver o conteúdo do seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s) e ver as
+soluções que o assistente de particionamento DrakX encontrou para onde
+instalar <application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">As opções disponíveis na lista abaixo irão variar, dependendo do layout e do
+conteúdo específicos do(s) seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center" >
+</imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Utilizar as partições existentes</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">Se esta opção estiver disponível, então partições existentes compatíveis com
+o Linux foram encontrados e podem ser utilizadas para a instalação.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">Usar o espaço livre</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em seu disco rígido, então esta opção irá
+usá-lo para a sua nova instalação da Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Use o espaço livre na partição do Windows</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em uma partição existente do Windows, o
+instalador pode oferecer para usá-lo.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">Esta pode ser uma maneira útil de obter espaço para a sua nova instalação da
+Mageia, mas é uma operação arriscada, por isso você deve ter a certeza de
+ter um backup de todos os arquivos importantes!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Note que isto envolve a redução do tamanho da partição do Windows. A
+partição deve ser "limpa", o que significa que o Windows deve ter fechado
+corretamente na última vez que foi usado. Deve também ter sido
+desfragmentado, embora isto não seja uma garantia de que todos os arquivos
+da partição foram movidos para fora da área que está prestes a ser usada. É
+altamente recomendável fazer backup de seus arquivos pessoais.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Apagar e utilizar o Disco Inteiro.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">Esta opção utilizará a unidade completa para a Mageia.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Atenção! Esta operação apagará todos os dados do disco rígido
+selecionado. Tenha cuidado!</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">Se você pretende utilizar parte do disco rígido para finalidade, ou você já
+tem dados na unidade que você não deseja perder, então não utilize esta
+opção.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">Personalizado</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">Isso lhe dará total controle sobre o local da instalação em seu(s) disco(s)
+rígido(s).</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Alguns discos mais recentes, estão usando setores lógicos de 4096 bytes, ao
+invés do padrão anterior de 512 bytes. Em razão da indisponibilidade de
+hardware, o programa de particionamento usado na instalação, ainda não foi
+testado com discos deste tipo. Também alguns discos ssd agora utilizam um
+erase block com mais de 1 MB. Se você possui um disco deste tipo, sugerimos
+o pré-particionamento do disco, usando um programa de particionamento
+alternativo, tipo o gparted, e use a seguinte configuração: </para>
+
+    <para>"Arredondar para" "MiB" </para>
+
+    <para>"Espaço livre Antes (MiB)" "2" </para>
+
+    <para>Certifique-se também que todas as partições tenham sido criadas com um
+número par de megabytes.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc793ec7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Parabéns</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text -->
+<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">Você terminou de instalar e configurar a <application>Mageia</application> e
+agora é seguro remover a mídia de instalação e reiniciar o seu computador.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">Depois de reiniciar, você poderá escolher, na tela do gerenciador de
+inicialização, entre os sistemas operacionais instalados no seu computador
+(se você tiver mais de um).</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">Se você não ajustar as configurações no Gerenciador de Inicialização, sua
+instalação Mageia será automaticamente selecionada e iniciada. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Divirta-se!</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Visite o site www.mageia.org se você tiver dúvidas ou quiser contribuir para
+a Mageia. </para>
+  
+  
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cbcc4291
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="formatPartitions">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatação</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Aqui você pode escolher qual(s) partição(s) que deseja formatar. Quaisquer
+dados nas partições marcadas para formatação <emphasis>não</emphasis> serão
+salvos.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Normalmente, pelo menos as partições DrakX selecionados precisam ser
+formatadas.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Clique em <guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> para escolher as partições que
+você deseja verificar os chamados <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">Se você não tem certeza de ter feito a escolha certa, você pode clicar em
+<guibutton>Anterior</guibutton>, novamente em
+<guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> e, em seguida,
+<guibutton>Personalizar</guibutton> para voltar à tela principal. Nessa tela
+você pode escolher para ver o que está em suas partições.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">Quando você estiver confiante em relação a seleção, clique em
+<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8960f47a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Atualizações</title></info>
+
+
+
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject> 
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Desde que esta versão da <application>Mageia</application> foi lançada,
+alguns pacotes foram atualizados ou melhorados.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Escolha <guilabel>sim</guilabel> se você deseja fazer o download e
+instalá-los, selecione <guilabel>não</guilabel> se você não quer fazer isso
+agora, ou se você não estiver conectado à Internet.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Em seguida, pressione <guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar.</para>
+
+</section>
+  
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8df2d226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="installer">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header - 
+      seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving -->
+<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block 
+       - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes  -->
+<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong -->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, o Instalador da Mageia</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Se você é novo no GNU-Linux ou um usuário experiente, o Instalador da Mageia
+foi feito para ajudar a fazer sua instalação ou atualização tão fácil quando
+possível.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <para>
+If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to
+  connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These
+  will be automatically detected and configured.</para> -->
+<para>A tela do menu inicial tem várias opções, porém a opção padrão irá iniciar o
+instalador, que será, normalmente, tudo o que você irá precisar.</para>
+
+  <figure xml:id="dx-welcome">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Primeira Tela da Instalação</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+  <para>Se houver problemas durante a instalação, então pode ser necessário usar
+opções de instalação especiais, consulte <xref
+linkend="installationOptions"></xref>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationSteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">As etapas de instalação</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>O processo de instalação é dividido em um número de passos, o que pode ser
+seguido no painel lateral da tela.</para>
+
+    <para>Cada passo tem uma ou mais telas que também podem ter botões
+<guibutton>Avançados</guibutton> com opções extras, menos comumente
+necessárias.</para>
+
+    <para>A maioria das telas tem botões de <guibutton>Ajuda</guibutton> que contém
+explicações sobre a etapa atual.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Se em algum momento durante a instalação, você decidir interromper a
+instalação, é possível reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de
+fazer isso.  Uma vez que a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações
+começaram a ser instaladas, o computador não está mais no mesmo estado e
+reiniciar ele poderá deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar disto,
+você está muito certo de que reiniciar é o que você quer, vá para um
+terminal de texto e pressione as três teclas <guibutton> Ctrl Alt F2
+</guibutton> ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, pressione <guibutton>Ctrl Alt
+Delete</guibutton> simultaneamente, para reiniciar.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationOptions">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti1">Opções de Instalação</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Se a instalação falhar, então pode ser necessário tentar de novo usando uma
+das opções extras disponíveis pressionando <guibutton>F1
+(Help)</guibutton>. Veja em <xref linkend="dx-welcome"></xref>Tela de Ajuda
+da Instalação</para>
+
+    <para>Isto abrirá o seguinte ajuda em modo texto.</para>
+
+    <figure xml:id="dx-help">
+<info>
+        <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti2">Tela de Ajuda da Instalação</title>
+      </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-help.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="installer-im2"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <section xml:id="installationProblems">
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Problemas de Instalação e Possíveis Soluções</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <section xml:id="noX">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="noX-ti2">Sem Interface Gráfica</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Após a tela inicial, você não chegou na tela de seleção de idioma.  Isto
+pode acontecer com algumas placas de vídeos e sistemas antigos. Tente usar
+uma resolução baixa teclando <code>vgalo</code> na tela de prompt
+(modo-texto).</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para revision="2">Se o hardware é muito antigo, uma instalação gráfica pode não ser
+possível. Neste caso, vale a pena tentar uma instalação em modo de texto.
+Para usar esta opção, tecle ESC na primeira tela de boas-vindas e confirme
+com ENTER. Aparecerá para você uma tela preta com a palavra "boot:". Tecle
+"text" e clique ENTER. Agora continue com a instalação em modo-texto.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="installFreezes">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">A Instalação Congela</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>Se o sistema parece congelar durante a instalação, isto pode ser um problema
+com a detecção de hardware. Neste caso, a detecção automática de hardware
+pode ser ignorada e tratada mais tarde. Para tentar desta forma, tecle
+<code>noauto</code> no prompt (tela modo-texto). Esta opção pode também ser
+combinada com outras opções, conforme necessário.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="kernelOptions">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">Opções do Kernel</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>Estas raramente serão necessárias, mas em alguns casos, o hardware pode
+relatar a memória RAM disponível de forma incorreta. Para especificar isso
+manualmente, você pode usar o parâmetro <code>mem=xxxM</code>, onde xxx é o
+a correta quantidade de RAM. Por exemplo <code>mem=256M</code> irá
+especificar 256MB de RAM.</para>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eb4a8819
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Seleção de Mídia (Nonfree)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Aqui você tem uma lista dos repositórios disponíveis. Nem todos os
+repositórios estarão disponíveis, dependendo do tipo de mídia que você
+estiver usando para a instalação. A seleção do repositório determinará quais
+pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção durante os próximos passos.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>O repositório <emphasis>Core</emphasis> não pode ser desabilitado uma vez
+que ele contém a base da distribuição.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>O repositório <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> inclui pacotes que são
+gratuitos, ou seja, a Mageia pode redistribuí-los, mas eles contêm
+código-fonte fechado (daí o nome - Nonfree). Por exemplo, este repositório
+inclui drivers proprietários para placas de vídeo nVidia e ATI, firmware
+para várias placas WiFi, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>O repositório <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> inclui pacotes distribuídos sob
+licença livre. O principal critério para colocar pacotes neste repositório é
+que eles podem infringir patentes e leis de direitos autorais em alguns
+países, por exemplo, codecs multimídia necessários para reproduzir vários
+arquivos de áudio/video; pacotes necessários para reproduzir DVD de vídeo
+comercial, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..274cae3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="minimal-install">
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Instalação Mínima</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+    <para>Você pode escolher uma instalação mínima desmarcando todas as seleções na
+tela Seleção do Grupo de Pacotes, ver <xref
+linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>A instalação mínima é destinado para aqueles com usos específicos em mente
+para sua <application>Mageia</application>, como um servidor ou estação de
+trabalho especializado. Você provavelmente irá utilizar esta opção,
+combinada com a seleção manual de pacotes, ver <xref
+linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>Se você escolher esta classe de instalação, em seguida, a próxima tela irá
+oferecer-lhe alguns pacotes extras úteis para instalar, tais como a
+documentação e o X.</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf01adb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Resumo de diversos parâmetros</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! -->
+<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots -->
+<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)-->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+      the drakxid-miscellaneous section -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph -->
+<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. -->
+<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" -->
+<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summary.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX fez escolhas inteligentes para a configuração do seu sistema,
+dependendo das escolhas que você fez e sobre o hardware detectado pelo
+DrakX. Você pode verificar as configurações aqui e alterá-las se você
+quiser, depois de pressionar <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">Parâmetros do Sistema</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Fuso horário</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX seleciona um fuso horário para você, dependendo de seu idioma
+preferido. Você pode mudá-lo se necessário. ver também <xref
+linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>País / Região</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">Se você não está no país selecionado, é muito importante que você corrija a
+configuração. Ver <xref linkend="selectCountry"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Gerenciador de Inicialização</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX fez boas opções para a configuração do gerenciador de inicialização.</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Não altere nada, a menos que você saiba como configurar o Grub e/ou o Lilo</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend="setupBootloader"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>Gerenciamento de usuário</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">Você pode adicionar usuários extras aqui. Cada um deles irão receber seus
+próprios diretórios na pasta <literal>/home</literal>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>Serviços</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">Serviços do sistema referem-se aos pequenos programas que rodam no
+background (daemons). Esta ferramenta permite habilitar ou desabilitar
+certas tarefas.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">Você deve verificar cuidadosamente antes de alterar qualquer coisa aqui - um
+erro pode impedir o seu computador de funcionar corretamente.</para>
+
+        <para>Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Parâmetro de Hardware</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>Teclado</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Isto é onde você configura ou altera o layout do teclado, que vai depender
+do seu Idioma, localização ou tipo de teclado.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Aqui você pode adicionar ou configurar outros dispositivos apontadores,
+tablets, trackballs, etc</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>Placa de Som</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">Esta seção permite-lhe fazer o ajuste fino da sua placa de som. Na maioria
+dos casos, as opções selecionadas irão funcionar com seu computador.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Interface Gráfica</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">Esta secção permite-lhe configurar sua placa(s) de vídeo(s) e monitores.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">Para mais informação, consulte <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"></xref>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summaryBottom-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Parâmetros de rede e internet</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>Rede</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">Você pode configurar sua rede aqui, mas para placas de rede com drivers
+não-livres é melhor fazer isso depois de reiniciar, no <application>Centro
+de Controle Mageia</application>, após ter habilitado as mídias dos
+repositórios não-livres.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">Quando você adiciona uma placa de rede, não se esqueça de configurar o seu
+firewall para ver aquela interface também.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">Um Servidor Proxy atua como um intermediário entre o computador e a
+Internet.  Esta secção permite-lhe configurar o computador para utilizar um
+serviço proxy.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">Você pode precisar consultar o seu administrador de sistemas para obter os
+parâmetros que você precisa inserir aqui.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Segurança</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Nível de Segurança</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Aqui você define o Nível de Segurança para seu computador, na maioria dos
+casos, a configuração padrão (Standard) é adequada para uso geral.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Verifique a opção que melhor se adapta ao seu uso.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">Um firewall pretende ser uma barreira entre seus dados importantes e os
+patifes lá fora, na internet, que possam comprometer ou roubar eles.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Selecione os serviços que você deseja que tenha acesso ao seu sistema. Suas
+opções vão depender de para que você usa seu computador.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Ter em mente que permitir tudo (sem firewall) pode ser muito arriscado.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0979aaa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+  version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+   
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 commented the empty paragraphs out-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Redimensionar partição
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application></title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">Você tem mais de uma partição do
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>. Escolha qual
+deve ser reduzida para dar espaço para a instalação
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  
+   
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6416f26d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Nível de Segurança</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+ 
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">Você pode ajustar o seu nível de segurança aqui.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Deixe as configurações padrão como estão, se você não sabe o que escolher.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">Após a instalação, sempre será possível ajustar as configurações de
+segurança na aba <guilabel>Segurança</guilabel> do Centro de Controle
+Mageia.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf7329ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Selecione seu país / região</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Selecione seu país ou região. Isso é importante para todos os tipos de
+configurações, como a moeda e domínio regulador do wireless. Definir o país
+errado pode levar a não ser capaz de usar uma rede sem fio.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">Se o seu país não está na lista, clique no botão <guilabel>Outros
+Países</guilabel> e escolha seu país / região lá.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">Se o seu país está apenas na lista <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel>,
+depois de clicar <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pode parecer um país de uma
+primeira lista foi escolhida. Por favor, ignore isso, o DrakX seguirá sua
+escolha real.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Método de entrada</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">Na tela <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel> você também pode selecionar um
+método de entrada (na parte inferior da lista). Métodos de entrada permitem
+a entrada de caracteres multilíngues (chinês, japonês, coreano, etc). IBus é
+o método de entrada padrão nos DVDs e nos live-CDs da Mageia para a
+África/Índia e Ásia/no-Índia. Para idiomas asiáticos e africanos, o IBus
+será definido como método de entrada padrão para que os usuários não
+precisem configurá-lo manualmente. Outros métodos de entrada (SCIM, gcin,
+HIME, etc) também oferecem funções semelhantes e podem ser instalados se
+você adicionou as mídias HTTP/FTP antes da seleção do pacote.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">Se você perdeu a configuração do método de entrada durante a instalação,
+você pode acessá-lo depois de inicializar o sistema instalado, acessando
+"Configure seu Computador" -> "Sistema", ou executando localedrake
+(gerenciador de localização/idiomas) como root.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9c8955bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+      "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed  -->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Instalar ou atualizar</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Instalar</para>
+
+      <para>Utilize esta opção para uma nova instalação
+<application>Mageia</application>.  .</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Atualizar</para>
+
+      <para>Se você tem uma ou mais instalações da <application>Mageia 2</application>
+em seu sistema, o instalador irá permitir que você atualize uma delas para a
+última versão.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Se durante a instalação você decidir interromper a instalação, é possível
+reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de fazer isso. Uma vez que
+a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações começaram a ser instaladas,
+o computador não estará mais no mesmo estado e reiniciar ele poderia muito
+bem deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar isso, você está muito
+certo de você quer reiniciar, vá para um terminal de texto, pressione as
+três teclas <guilabel>Alt Ctrl F2</guilabel>, ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso,
+pressione <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</guilabel> simultaneamente para
+reiniciar.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>Se você descobriu que você esqueceu de selecionar um idioma adicional, você
+pode retornar a partir da tela "Instalar ou Atualizar" para a tela de
+escolha de idioma pressionando <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Home</guilabel>. <emphasis>Não</emphasis> faça isso mais tarde na
+instalação.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a1716d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Teclado</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX seleciona um teclado adequado ao seu idioma. Se nenhum teclado
+adequado for encontrado, ele será o padrão para um layout de teclado dos
+EUA.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" align="center" >
+</imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Certifique-se que a seleção está correta ou escolha outro layout de
+teclado. Se você não sabe qual o layout do seu teclado possui, procure nas
+especificações que acompanham o sistema ou peça ao fornecedor do
+computador. Pode até haver uma etiqueta no teclado que identifica o
+layout. Você também pode procurar aqui:<link
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">Se o seu teclado não está na lista exibida, clique em
+<guibutton>Mais</guibutton> para obter uma lista completa, e selecionar o
+seu teclado lá.</para>
+
+      <para revision="1"><warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">Depois de escolher um teclado a partir do diálogo
+<guibutton>Mais</guibutton>, você vai voltar para a primeira caixa de
+diálogo de escolha do teclado e vai parecer que um teclado daquela tela foi
+escolhido. Você pode ignorar esta anomalia e continuar a instalação: O
+teclado é aquele que você escolheu da lista completa.</para>
+        </warning></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">Se você escolher um teclado baseado em caracteres não latinos, você verá uma
+tela de diálogo extra perguntando como você prefere alternar entre os
+layouts de teclados latinos e não latinos.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d5925cff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+       code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+       up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Por favor, escolha um idioma para usar</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Selecione o seu idioma preferido, pela primeira ampliação da lista para o
+seu continente. A <application>Mageia</application> irá utilizar essa
+seleção durante a instalação e para o sistema instalado.</para>
+
+  <para>Se é provável que você vai exigir vários idiomas instalado em seu sistema,
+para si ou para outros usuários, então você deve usar o botão
+<guibutton>Múltiplas linguagens</guibutton> para adicioná-los agora. Vai ser
+difícil adicionar o suporte a idiomas adicionais após a instalação.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Mesmo se você escolher mais de um idioma, você deve primeiro escolher um
+deles como seu idioma preferido na primeira tela de idiomas. Também será
+marcado como escolhido na tela de múltiplos idiomas.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Se o idioma do teclado não é o mesmo que o seu idioma preferido, então é
+aconselhável instalar o idioma do teclado também.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>A Mageia usa UTF-8 (Unicode) por padrão. Isso pode ser desativado na tela
+"múltiplas linguagens" se você sabe que é inadequado para o seu idioma. A
+desativação do UTF-8 se aplicada a todos os idiomas instalados.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Você pode alterar o idioma do seu sistema após a instalação no Centro de
+Controle Mageia -> Sistema -> Gerenciar Localização para o seu Sistema.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a11575f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Selecione o mouse</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="selectMouse-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">Se você não está feliz com a forma como o mouse responde, você pode
+selecionar um diferente aqui.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Geralmente, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - Qualquer <guilabel>mouse PS/2
+ou USB</guilabel> é uma boa escolha.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Selecione <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel>
+para configurar os botões que não funcionam em um mouse com seis ou mais
+botões.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4c9e8b7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+
+ 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">Se você preferir que as configurações do gerenciador de inicialização
+(bootloader) sejam diferentes daquelas escolhidas automaticamente pelo
+instalador, você pode alterá-las aqui.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">Você pode já ter outro sistema operacional em sua máquina, neste caso, você
+precisa decidir se deseja adicionar a Mageia no seu gerenciador de
+inicialização existente, ou permitir que a Mageia crie um novo.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa3">O menu gráfico da Mageia é ótimo :)</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Usando o Gerenciador de Inicialização da Mageia</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">Por padrão a Mageia grava um novo gerenciador de inicialização (bootlader)
+GRUB no MBR (Master Boot Record) do seu primeiro disco rígido. Se você já
+tem outros sistemas operacionais instalados, a Mageia tentará adicioná-los
+ao seu novo menu de inicialização.</para>
+
+    <para revision="3">A Mageia agora oferece também o GRUB2 como gerenciador de inicialização
+opcional, em adição ao GRUB original e Lilo.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Os sistemas Linux que utilizam o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2,
+atualmente não são suportados pelo GRUB (original) e não serão reconhecidos
+se for utilizado o GRUB padrão.</para>
+
+      <para revision="3">A melhor solução neste caso é utilizar o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2
+que está disponível na página de resumo durante a instalação.</para>
+    </warning>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Usando um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">Se você decidir usar um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente, então você
+precisa se lembrar de PARAR na página de resumo durante a instalação e
+clicar no botão <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton> "Gerenciador de
+Inicialização", o que permitirá que você mude o local de instalação do
+Gerenciador de Inicialização.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Não selecione um dispositivo, por exemplo, "sda", ou você irá substituir sua
+MBR existente. Você deve selecionar a partição que você escolheu durante a
+fase de particionamento anterior, por exemplo: sda7.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">Para ficar claro, sda é um dispositivo, sda7 é uma partição.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Ir para tty2 com Ctrl+Alt+F2 e tecle <literal>df</literal> para verificar
+onde a partição <literal>/</literal> (raiz) está.  Ctrl+Alt+F7 leva você de
+volta para a tela do instalador.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">O procedimento exato para adicionar o seu sistema Mageia ao Gerenciador de
+Inicialização existente, está além do escopo desta ajuda, no entanto, na
+maioria dos casos irá envolver a execução adequado de um programa de
+instalação do Gerenciador de Inicialização, que deve detectá-lo e
+adicioná-lo automaticamente. Consulte a documentação para o sistema
+operacional em questão.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Opções Avançadas do Gerenciador de Inicialização</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">Se você tiver espaço em disco muito limitado para a partição
+<literal>/</literal> (raiz) que contém <literal>/tmp</literal>, clique em
+<guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> e marque a caixa <guilabel>Limpar /tmp a
+cada inicialização</guilabel>. Isto ajuda a obter algum espaço livre
+adicional.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fd5321db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Adicionando ou Modificando uma Entrada do Menu de Inicialização</title></info>
+
+	
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  
+  
+  <para>Você pode adicionar uma entrada ou modificar a que você selecionar primeiro,
+pressionando o botão correspondente na janela de <emphasis>Configuração do
+Menu de Inicialização</emphasis> e editando a janela que abrir em cima dela.</para>
+
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  <para>Algumas coisas que podem ser feitas sem qualquer risco são, mudar o rótulo
+de uma entrada e selecionar a caixa de uma entrada para torná-la padrão.</para>
+  <para>Você pode adicionar o número da versão correta de uma entrada, ou renomeá-la
+completamente.</para>
+  <para>A entrada padrão vai inicializar o sistema se você não fizer uma escolha
+durante a inicialização.</para>
+<warning><para>Editar outras coisas pode fazer com que o sistema não inicie. Por favor, não
+tente algo sem saber o que está fazendo.</para></warning>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fa21c9a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Detecção de disco rígido</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+       Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">O DrakX normalmente detecta discos rígidos corretamente. Pode, contudo, não
+detectar alguns controladores de disco SCSI antigos e, portanto, deixar de
+instalar os drivers necessários.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">Se isso acontecer, você terá que manualmente dizer ao Drakx qual o
+dispositivo(s) SCSI que você tem.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">O DrakX deve então ser capaz de configurar o dispositivo(s) corretamente.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eea74877
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirme o disco rígido para ser formatado</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+    hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+    saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"
+align="center" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Clique em <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tem certeza sobre sua
+escolha.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton> se você tem certeza e deseja apagar
+todas as partições, cada sistema operacional e todos os dados no disco
+rígido.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr.po b/docs/installer/tr.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d85ecbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr.po
@@ -0,0 +1,3272 @@
+# Turkish translation of Mageia Installer Help
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer package.
+# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
+"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
+"Language-Team: Turkish <i18n-discuss@ml.mageia.org>\n"
+"Language: tr\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32
+msgid "License and Release Notes"
+msgstr "License and Release Notes"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"license.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" width=\"800\" xml:id="
+"\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45
+msgid "License Agreement"
+msgstr "License Agreement"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
+"terms and conditions carefully."
+msgstr ""
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
+"terms and conditions carefully."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
+"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
+msgstr ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
+"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
+"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
+"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68
+msgid "Release Notes"
+msgstr "Release Notes"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:4
+msgid "User and Superuser Management"
+msgstr "User and Superuser Management"
+
+#.  Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+#.        changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+#.        about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+#.        disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+#.        screen), marja, 20120409
+#.  barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+#.        "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? 
+#.  JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2013-04-26 added new note 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/addUser.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:34
+msgid "Set Administrator (root)  Password:"
+msgstr "Set Administrator (root)  Password:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
+"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
+"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
+"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
+"the first password by comparing them."
+msgstr ""
+"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
+"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
+"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
+"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
+"the first password by comparing them."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+msgstr ""
+"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:56
+msgid "Enter a user"
+msgstr "Enter a user"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but "
+"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and "
+"anything else the average user does with his computer"
+msgstr ""
+"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but "
+"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and "
+"anything else the average user does with his computer"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the "
+"users icon."
+msgstr ""
+"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the "
+"users icon."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
+"box."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
+"box."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
+"sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
+"sensitive.</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
+"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
+"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
+"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
+"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
+"password text boxes."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
+"password text boxes."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+msgstr ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+msgstr ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:109
+msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+msgstr "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:116
+msgid "Advanced User Management"
+msgstr "Advanced User Management"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a "
+"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. "
+"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account."
+msgstr ""
+"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a "
+"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. "
+"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account "
+"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest "
+"should save his important files to a USB key."
+msgstr ""
+"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account "
+"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest "
+"should save his important files to a USB key."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a "
+"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, "
+"but he has more restricted access than normal users."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a "
+"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, "
+"but he has more restricted access than normal users."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the "
+"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are "
+"Bash, Dash and Sh"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the "
+"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are "
+"Bash, Dash and Sh"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:144
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you "
+"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless "
+"you know what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you "
+"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless "
+"you know what you are doing."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a "
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
+"what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a "
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
+"what you are doing."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11
+msgid "Choose the mount points"
+msgstr "Choose the mount points"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 
+#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) 
+#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes 
+#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
+#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) 
+#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id="
+"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
+"can change the mount points."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
+"can change the mount points."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
+"(root) partition."
+msgstr ""
+"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
+"(root) partition."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\", \"Type\")."
+msgstr ""
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\", \"Type\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+msgstr ""
+"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
+"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
+"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
+"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
+"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
+"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
+"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount "
+"point field blank."
+msgstr ""
+"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount "
+"point field blank."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, "
+"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen "
+"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+msgstr ""
+"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, "
+"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen "
+"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
+"DrakX suggests, or more."
+msgstr ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
+"DrakX suggests, or more."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:18
+msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+msgstr "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+msgstr ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will "
+"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need."
+msgstr ""
+"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will "
+"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:35
+msgid "Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr "Installation Welcome Screen"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align="
+"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-"
+"intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use "
+"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use "
+"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></"
+"xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:52
+msgid "The installation steps"
+msgstr "The installation steps"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
+"on the side panel of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
+"on the side panel of the screen."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+msgstr ""
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further "
+"explanations about the current step."
+msgstr ""
+"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further "
+"explanations about the current step."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is "
+"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is "
+"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:80
+msgid "Installation options"
+msgstr "Installation options"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one "
+"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</"
+"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one "
+"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</"
+"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:87
+msgid "This will open the following text based help."
+msgstr "This will open the following text based help."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:91
+msgid "Installation Help Screen"
+msgstr "Installation Help Screen"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align="
+"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"installer-"
+"im2\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:105
+msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+msgstr "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:111
+msgid "No Graphical Interface"
+msgstr "No Graphical Interface"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
+"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low "
+"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
+"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low "
+"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
+"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
+"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
+"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
+"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:135
+msgid "The Install Freezes"
+msgstr "The Install Freezes"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of "
+"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with "
+"other options as necessary."
+msgstr ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of "
+"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with "
+"other options as necessary."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:147
+msgid "Kernel Options"
+msgstr "Kernel Options"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
+"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+msgstr ""
+"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
+"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23
+msgid "Install or Upgrade"
+msgstr "Install or Upgrade"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectinstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34
+msgid "Install"
+msgstr "Install"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41
+msgid "Upgrade"
+msgstr "Upgrade"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on "
+"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the "
+"latest release."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have one or more previous installations of <application>Mageia</"
+"application> on your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of "
+"them to the latest release."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
+"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
+"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
+"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
+"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
+"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
+"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
+"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
+"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14
+msgid "Keyboard"
+msgstr "Keyboard"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"selectKeyboard.png\" width=\"800\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
+"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
+msgstr ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
+"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
+"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
+"full list."
+msgstr ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
+"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
+"full list."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin "
+"and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+msgstr ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin "
+"and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Services"
+msgstr "Configure your Services"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
+"see all services in it."
+msgstr ""
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
+"see all services in it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:34
+msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good."
+msgstr "The setting DrakX chose are usually good."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+msgstr ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:41
+msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+msgstr "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23
+msgid "Please choose a language to use"
+msgstr "Please choose a language to use"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during "
+"the installation and for your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during "
+"the installation and for your installed system."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
+"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
+"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+msgstr ""
+"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
+"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
+"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
+"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
+msgstr ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
+"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well."
+msgstr ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the "
+"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your "
+"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages."
+msgstr ""
+"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the "
+"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your "
+"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia "
+"Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system."
+msgstr ""
+"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia "
+"Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4
+msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+msgstr "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03 
+#.  test comment - johnr 
+#.  2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your "
+"choice."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
+"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
+"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25
+msgid "Partitioning"
+msgstr "Partitioning"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the "
+"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the "
+"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your "
+"particular hard drive(s) layout and content."
+msgstr ""
+"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your "
+"particular hard drive(s) layout and content."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"doPartitionDisks.png\" width=\"800\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45
+msgid "Use Existing Partitions"
+msgstr "Use Existing Partitions"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54
+msgid "Use Free Space"
+msgstr "Use Free Space"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62
+msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition"
+msgstr "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, "
+"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all "
+"important files!"
+msgstr ""
+"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, "
+"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all "
+"important files!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The "
+"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to "
+"back up your personal files."
+msgstr ""
+"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The "
+"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to "
+"back up your personal files."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84
+msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk."
+msgstr "Erase and use Entire Disk."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87
+msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia."
+msgstr "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90
+msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!"
+msgstr "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already "
+"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use "
+"this option."
+msgstr ""
+"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already "
+"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use "
+"this option."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100
+msgid "Custom"
+msgstr "Custom"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
+"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
+"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
+"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117
+msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\""
+msgstr "Free space preceding (MiB) : 2"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5
+msgid "Desktop Selection"
+msgstr "Desktop Selection"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
+"tune your choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
+"tune your choice."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package "
+"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the "
+"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button"
+msgstr ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package "
+"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the "
+"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or "
+"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full "
+"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if "
+"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the "
+"default software choices for these desktop environments. The "
+"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, "
+"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or "
+"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full "
+"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if "
+"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the "
+"default software choices for these desktop environments. The "
+"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, "
+"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4
+msgid "Package Group Selection"
+msgstr "Package Group Selection"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+msgstr ""
+"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23
+msgid "Workstation."
+msgstr "Workstation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27
+msgid "Server."
+msgstr "Server."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31
+msgid "Graphical Environment."
+msgstr "Graphical Environment."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
+"remove packages."
+msgstr ""
+"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
+"remove packages."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+msgstr ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4
+msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
+msgstr "Choose Individual Packages"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
+"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
+"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
+"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
+"choosing to load it."
+msgstr ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
+"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
+"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
+"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
+"choosing to load it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:19
+msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake"
+msgstr "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
+"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+msgstr ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
+"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
+"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
+"is in them before you start."
+msgstr ""
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
+"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
+"is in them before you start."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
+"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+msgstr ""
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
+"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
+"storage device"
+msgstr ""
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
+"storage device"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it."
+msgstr ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:49
+msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes."
+msgstr "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:51
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready."
+msgstr "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:4
+msgid "Congratulations"
+msgstr "Congratulations"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text 
+#.  same day, added "s" to "sytems"
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
+"your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
+"your computer."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
+"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+msgstr ""
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
+"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+msgstr ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:31
+msgid "Enjoy!"
+msgstr "Enjoy!"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to "
+"Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to "
+"Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4
+msgid "Formatting"
+msgstr "Formatting"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
+"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29
+msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted"
+msgstr "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to "
+"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to "
+"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> "
+"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.  "
+"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions."
+msgstr ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> "
+"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.  "
+"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> to continue."
+msgstr ""
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> to continue."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:3
+msgid "Updates"
+msgstr "Updates"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 30 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename
+#.  marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some "
+"packages will have been updated or improved."
+msgstr ""
+"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some "
+"packages will have been updated or improved."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, "
+"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, "
+"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:28
+msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue"
+msgstr "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:3
+msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
+msgstr "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
+
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 31 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! 
+#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots 
+#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+#.       the drakxid-miscellaneous section 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph 
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph 
+#.  2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. 
+#.  2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" 
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" width="
+"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"summary-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want after pressing "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want after pressing "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:45
+msgid "System parameters"
+msgstr "System parameters"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:50
+msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/"
+">"
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC"
+"\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:58
+msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you "
+"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you "
+"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:67
+msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:69
+msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting."
+msgstr "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo"
+msgstr ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:75
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>"
+msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:80
+msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
+"literal> directories."
+msgstr ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
+"literal> directories and will not be able to look in your or each other's "
+"documents, mails, pictures and other files."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:89
+msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run the background "
+"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks."
+msgstr ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run the background "
+"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly."
+msgstr ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:99
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:106
+msgid "Hardware parameters"
+msgstr "Hardware parameters"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:111
+msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on "
+"your location, language or type of keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on "
+"your location, language or type of keyboard."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:119
+msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:126
+msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the "
+"options selected will work with your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the "
+"options selected will work with your computer."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:135
+msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:138
+msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+msgstr ""
+"This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:141
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+"For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id="
+"\"summaryBottom-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:155
+msgid "Network and Internet parameters"
+msgstr "Network and Internet parameters"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:161
+msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media "
+"repositories."
+msgstr ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application>, after having enabled the non-free media "
+"repositories."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:170
+msgid ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch "
+"that interface as well."
+msgstr ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch "
+"that interface as well."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:177
+msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+msgstr ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
+"need to enter here"
+msgstr ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
+"need to enter here"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:193
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Security"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:198
+msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
+"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
+"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:205
+msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage."
+msgstr "Check the option which best suits your usage."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:210
+msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the "
+"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it."
+msgstr ""
+"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the "
+"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your "
+"selections will depend on what you use your computer for."
+msgstr ""
+"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your "
+"selections will depend on what you use your computer for."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:221
+msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky."
+msgstr "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Timezone"
+msgstr "Configure your Timezone"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
+"same time zone."
+msgstr ""
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
+"same time zone."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
+"GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr ""
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
+"GMT, also known as UTC."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11
+msgid "Setup SCSI"
+msgstr "Setup SCSI"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 
+#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) 
+#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" width="
+"\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
+"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"fail to recognise the drive."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
+"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"fail to recognise the drive."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
+"you have."
+msgstr ""
+"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
+"you have."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
+msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly."
+msgstr "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:4
+msgid "Select mouse"
+msgstr "Select mouse"
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+msgstr ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
+"guilabel> is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
+"guilabel> is a good choice."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to "
+"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons."
+msgstr ""
+"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to "
+"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3
+msgid "Bootloader main options"
+msgstr "Bootloader main options"
+
+#.  2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+#.  2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"100%\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format="
+"\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
+"the installer, you can change them here."
+msgstr ""
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
+"the installer, you can change them here."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
+"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"allow Mageia to create a new one."
+msgstr ""
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
+"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"allow Mageia to create a new one."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26
+msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)"
+msgstr "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32
+msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader"
+msgstr "Using a Mageia bootloader"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR "
+"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other "
+"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia "
+"boot menu."
+msgstr ""
+"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR "
+"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other "
+"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia "
+"boot menu."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+msgstr ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+msgstr ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+msgstr ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56
+msgid "Using an existing bootloader"
+msgstr "Using an existing bootloader"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
+"bootloader install location."
+msgstr ""
+"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
+"bootloader install location."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
+"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"phase earlier, e.g.  sda7."
+msgstr ""
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
+"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"phase earlier, e.g.  sda7."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71
+msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device."
+msgstr "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
+"the installer screen."
+msgstr ""
+"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
+"the installer screen."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
+"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
+"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"question."
+msgstr ""
+"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
+"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
+"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"question."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91
+msgid "Bootloader advanced option"
+msgstr "Bootloader advanced option"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
+"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+msgstr ""
+"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
+"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "tr"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:3
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr "Installation with DrakX"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:6
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr "<note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:10
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr "</note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakX.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16
+msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+msgstr "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"800\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:"
+"id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+msgstr ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69
+msgid "vendor"
+msgstr "vendor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36
+msgid "then the name of your card"
+msgstr "then the name of your card"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40
+msgid "and the type of card"
+msgstr "and the type of card"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"Xorg category"
+msgstr ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"Xorg category"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
+"drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
+"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
+msgstr ""
+"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
+"drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
+"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the Commandline Interface."
+msgstr ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the Commandline Interface."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some "
+"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites"
+msgstr ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some "
+"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to "
+"access them, you should do this after your first reboot."
+msgstr ""
+"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to "
+"access them, you should do this after your first reboot."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18
+msgid "Choosing your Monitor"
+msgstr "Choosing your Monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+msgstr ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage "
+"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing "
+"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor "
+"documentation"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage "
+"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing "
+"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor "
+"documentation"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"configureX_monitor.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" width=\"800\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
+msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+msgstr ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55
+msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
+"monitor database."
+msgstr ""
+"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
+"monitor database."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63
+msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:"
+msgstr ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73
+msgid "the monitor manufacturers name"
+msgstr "the monitor manufacturers name"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77
+msgid "the monitor description"
+msgstr "the monitor description"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82
+msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
+"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
+"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
+"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+msgstr ""
+"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
+"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
+"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
+"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4
+msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
+msgstr "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
+
+#.  Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" width=\"100%\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
+"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
+"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
+"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
+"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
+"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
+"think the choice is incorrect."
+msgstr ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
+"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
+"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
+"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
+"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
+"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
+"think the choice is incorrect."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card "
+"from the list if needed."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card "
+"from the list if needed."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor "
+"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. "
+"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the "
+"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor "
+"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. "
+"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the "
+"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45
+msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor"
+msgstr "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
+"resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
+"resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
+"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
+"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
+"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
+"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
+"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
+"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
+"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
+"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
+"emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
+"enable or disable various options."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
+"enable or disable various options."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5
+msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+msgstr "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the "
+"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen "
+"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it."
+msgstr ""
+"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the "
+"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen "
+"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an "
+"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one."
+msgstr ""
+"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an "
+"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely."
+msgstr ""
+"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a "
+"choice while booting up."
+msgstr ""
+"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a "
+"choice while booting up."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't "
+"just try something without knowing what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't "
+"just try something without knowing what you are doing."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:3
+msgid "Minimal Install"
+msgstr "Minimal Install"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
+"xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised "
+"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package "
+"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised "
+"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package "
+"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer "
+"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X."
+msgstr ""
+"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer "
+"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:12
+msgid "Security Level"
+msgstr "Security Level"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:24
+msgid "You can adjust your security level here."
+msgstr "You can adjust your security level here."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose."
+msgstr ""
+"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings "
+"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center."
+msgstr ""
+"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings "
+"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:13
+msgid "Select your Country / Region"
+msgstr "Select your Country / Region"
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network."
+msgstr ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
+"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+msgstr ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
+"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, "
+"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the "
+"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, "
+"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the "
+"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real "
+"choice."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:46
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr "Input method"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
+"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
+"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+msgstr ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
+"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
+"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -&gt; "
+"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root."
+msgstr ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -&gt; "
+"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:3
+msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
+msgstr "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+msgstr ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+msgstr ""
+"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+msgstr ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10
+msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
+msgstr "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
+"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"during the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
+"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"during the next steps."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29
+msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+msgstr "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33
+msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up."
+msgstr "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With "
+"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With "
+"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
+"installation."
+
+#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>"
+#~ msgstr "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install "
+#~ "<application>Mageia</application>."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install "
+#~ "<application>Mageia</application>."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk "
+#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk "
+#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you have a SSD (Solid State Drive) instead of a hard disk, at the time "
+#~ "this help was written, it was inadvisable to create the partitions with "
+#~ "this tool because they would not be aligned. The SSD would work but with "
+#~ "reduced speed and lifetime. Use a partitioning tool such as Gparted "
+#~ "instead with these partition alignment settings for each partition :"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If you have a SSD (Solid State Drive) instead of a hard disk, at the time "
+#~ "this help was written, it was inadvisable to create the partitions with "
+#~ "this tool because they would not be aligned. The SSD would work but with "
+#~ "reduced speed and lifetime. Use a partitioning tool such as Gparted "
+#~ "instead with these partition alignment settings for each partition :"
+
+#~ msgid "Round to cylinders : unchecked"
+#~ msgstr "Round to cylinders : unchecked"
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)"
+#~ msgstr "Bootloader main options (old page)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main "
+#~ "options''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because "
+#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main "
+#~ "options''' screen in installer links to."
+
+#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)"
+#~ msgstr "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card "
+#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> "
+#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card "
+#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to."
+
+#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use"
+#~ msgstr "Bootloader expert use"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/"
+#~ "> first."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/"
+#~ "> first."
+
+#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually"
+#~ msgstr "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version "
+#~ "run the following command in a terminal:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version "
+#~ "run the following command in a terminal:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "or if that fails try:"
+#~ msgstr "or if that fails try:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom "
+#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 "
+#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during "
+#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom "
+#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 "
+#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during "
+#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root "
+#~ "partition:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root "
+#~ "partition:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "This will output something like :"
+#~ msgstr "This will output something like :"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it."
+#~ msgstr "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the "
+#~ "following command:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the "
+#~ "following command:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a "
+#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu."
+#~ "lst below."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a "
+#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu."
+#~ "lst below."
+
+#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia."
+#~ msgstr "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the "
+#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the "
+#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:"
+
+#~ msgid "To become root use:"
+#~ msgstr "To become root use:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(enter root password)"
+#~ msgstr "(enter root password)"
+
+#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:"
+#~ msgstr "To open the file in an editor use:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)"
+#~ msgstr "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the "
+#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on "
+#~ "its position in the file:"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the "
+#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on "
+#~ "its position in the file:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" "
+#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy "
+#~ "GRUB count from zero."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" "
+#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy "
+#~ "GRUB count from zero."
+
+#~ msgid "Therefore:"
+#~ msgstr "Therefore:"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :"
+#~ msgstr "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :"
+
+#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub"
+#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub"
+#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</"
+#~ "literal> from the last line."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</"
+#~ "literal> from the last line."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in "
+#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in "
+#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it."
+
+#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader"
+#~ msgstr "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader "
+#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader "
+#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some "
+#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding "
+#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details "
+#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the "
+#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some "
+#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding "
+#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details "
+#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the "
+#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information."
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel "
+#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub."
+#~ "d/40_custom</literal>"
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel "
+#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub."
+#~ "d/40_custom</literal>"
+
+#~ msgid ""
+#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. "
+#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the "
+#~ "preferred solution."
+#~ msgstr ""
+#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. "
+#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the "
+#~ "preferred solution."
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d7d3c61d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <title>Installation with DrakX</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+
+
+  
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+ 
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  
+<!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ -->
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..92717d14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="acceptLicense"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+       http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html  -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+       but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( 
+       ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not 
+       sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR  2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">License and Release Notes</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" depth="600"
+fileref="dx2-license.png" format="PNG" revision="1" width="800"
+xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="license">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="license-ti1">License Agreement</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license
+terms and conditions carefully.</para>
+
+    <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire
+<application>Mageia</application> distribution and must be accepted before
+you can continue.</para>
+
+    <para>To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for
+looking. Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer.</para>
+
+    
+  <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+       marja, 20120405  -->
+</section>
+
+  <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+    <!--
+  <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Release Notes</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+    <para>To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>,
+click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f59bd404
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User and Superuser Management</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+       changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+       about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+       disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+       screen), marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+       "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+width="100%" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="root-password">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root)  Password:</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to
+set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the
+<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the
+top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green
+depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are
+using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box
+just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped
+the first password by comparing them.</para>
+
+    <note xml:id="givePassword">
+      <para>All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters
+(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="enterUser">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Enter a user</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but
+enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and
+anything else the average user does with his computer</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the
+users icon.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text
+box.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let
+drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case
+sensitive.</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user
+password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the
+strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend="givePassword"></xref>)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this
+text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user
+password text boxes.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+   <note>
+      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but
+write protected) home directory.</para>
+
+      <para>However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC -
+System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected.</para>
+
+      <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised
+to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para>
+
+      <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all
+extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step
+during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+      <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para>
+   </note>
+
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Advanced User Management</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a
+screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are
+adding. Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para>Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account
+saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest
+should save his important files to a USB key.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a
+guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC,
+but he has more restricted access than normal users.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the
+shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you
+are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless
+you know what you are doing.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a
+number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know
+what you are doing.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..24f0d8b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)</title>
+    </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The
+source selection determines which packages will be available for selection
+during the next steps.</para>
+
+  <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. </para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With
+the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS
+installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5637749e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Choose the mount points</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+       with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+       write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+align="center" width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If
+you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you
+can change the mount points.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal>
+(root) partition.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Every partition is shown as follows: "Device" ("Capacity", "Mount point",
+"Type").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>"Device", is made up of: "hard drive", ["hard drive number"(letter)],
+"partition number" (for example, "sda5").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from
+the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal>
+and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store
+your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the
+<literal>/home</literal> partition of a cauldron install.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount
+point field blank.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose,
+and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen
+that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the
+partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2052c4de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="chooseDesktop">
+
+
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Desktop Selection</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+
+
+    <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine
+tune your choice.</para>
+
+    <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package
+installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the
+<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" width="800" depth="600"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or
+<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full
+set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if
+you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the
+default software choices for these desktop environments. The
+<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two,
+sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7ec198e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="choosePackageGroups">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Package Group Selection</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" width="800" depth="600"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Workstation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Server.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Graphical Environment.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or
+remove packages.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install.</para> 
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..468e873e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" width="800" depth="600"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your
+installation.</para>
+
+    <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy
+icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages
+(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the
+same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install
+and choosing to load it.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d88c6c13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your
+system.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and
+see all services in it.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">The setting DrakX chose are usually good.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info
+box below.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..671dd296
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the
+same time zone.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to
+GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they
+are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..33eb4e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" 
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" 
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" 
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" 
+xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" 
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof  -->
+<!-- lproof  -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata width="800" revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
+format="PNG" depth="600"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually
+correctly identify your video device.</para>
+  
+  <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know
+which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:
+    
+  <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>vendor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>then the name of your card</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>and the type of card</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+Xorg category</para>
+  
+  <para>The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card
+drivers.  If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the
+option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
+	
+  <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the Commandline Interface.</para>
+	
+
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some
+cases only from the card manufacturers' websites </para>
+	
+  <para>The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to
+access them, you should do this after your first reboot.</para>
+	
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..18a0c2f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+width="100%" align="center" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
+you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are
+all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window
+System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for
+<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or
+any other graphical environment to work well, the following
+<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct
+settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a
+choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card
+from the list if needed.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor
+from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel>
+list. Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the
+horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired
+resolution and color depth of your monitor here.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
+always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your
+settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your
+settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be
+kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen
+and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make
+sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't
+available</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to
+enable or disable various options.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5a2ff54d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+correctly identify yours.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage
+your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing
+what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor
+documentation</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" depth="600"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" format="PNG" revision="1" width="800"
+xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Custom</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh
+rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
+screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are
+displayed.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor
+type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
+may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
+monitor database.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Vendor</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>vendor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor manufacturers name</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor description</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver
+when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it
+may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ad76d0cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="diskdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+	
+	
+	
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on
+    any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on
+      your <literal>
+/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root 
+      Also added some text. -->
+<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs-->
+<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
+align="center"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+<warning>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you
+must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The
+encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be
+set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions,
+change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what
+is in them before you start.
+ </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an
+USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them.
+  </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected
+storage device</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
+or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it.</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7">Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready.</para> </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ad9285df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-20 Yes I agree with Lebarhon - reference to home partition removed -->
+<!-- Simonnzg - doing anything to a Windows partition is DANGEROUS. I would prefer 
+       if this was not an option, but... -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 put the para xml id's back.  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-29 changed text as discussed on the ml and with papoteur's approval
+ lebarhon: 2012-08-18 warning added-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 changed warning to text suggested by Dave Hodgings in bug 9594 -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by obgr_seneca -->
+<!-- lebarhon 2013-04-11 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by Dave Hodgins/Marja-->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Partitioning</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the
+solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The options available from the list below will vary depending on your
+particular hard drive(s) layout and content.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" depth="600"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" width="800"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Use Existing Partitions</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have
+been found and may be used for the installation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">Use Free Space</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for
+your new Mageia installation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may
+offer to use it.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation,
+but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all
+important files!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The
+partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down
+correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented,
+although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been
+moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to
+back up your personal files.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Erase and use Entire Disk.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will use the complete drive for Mageia.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already
+have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use
+this option.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">Custom</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your
+hard drive(s).</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available
+hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested
+with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1
+MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning
+tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following
+settings: </para>
+
+    <para>"Align to" "MiB" </para>
+
+    <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2" </para>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b17aa02b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Congratulations</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text -->
+<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+width="800" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="exitInstall-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">You have finished installing and configuring
+<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the
+installation medium and reboot your computer.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating
+systems on your computer (if you have more than one).</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install
+will be automatically selected and started. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Enjoy!</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to
+Mageia </para>
+  
+  
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8d1f9576
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="formatPartitions">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png"
+width="100%" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to
+check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
+and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.
+In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selection, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3e3258ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Updates</title></info>
+
+
+
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+width="100%" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> 
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some
+packages will have been updated or improved.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them,
+select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para>
+
+</section>
+  
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml b/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..242173d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="installer">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header - 
+      seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving -->
+<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block 
+       - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes  -->
+<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong -->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia
+Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as
+possible.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <para>
+If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to
+  connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These
+  will be automatically detected and configured.</para> -->
+<para>The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will
+start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need.</para>
+
+  <figure xml:id="dx-welcome">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Installation Welcome Screen</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"
+align="center" width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+  <para>If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use
+special installation options, see <xref
+linkend="installationOptions"></xref>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationSteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">The installation steps</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed
+on the side panel of the screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required,
+options.</para>
+
+    <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further
+explanations about the current step.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is
+possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationOptions">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti1">Installation options</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one
+of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1
+(Help)</guibutton> key see <xref linkend="dx-welcome"></xref></para>
+
+    <para>This will open the following text based help.</para>
+
+    <figure xml:id="dx-help">
+<info>
+        <title xml:id="installationOptions-ti2">Installation Help Screen</title>
+      </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../dx-help.png"
+align="center" width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="installer-im2"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <section xml:id="installationProblems">
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <section xml:id="noX">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="noX-ti2">No Graphical Interface</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection
+screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using
+low resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para revision="2">If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
+possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use
+this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be
+presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit
+ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="installFreezes">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">The Install Freezes</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a
+problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of
+hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type
+<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with
+other options as necessary.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="kernelOptions">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">Kernel Options</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7afd82b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Media Selection (Nonfree)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are
+available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories
+selection determines which packages will be available for selection during
+the next steps.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains
+the base of the distribution.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are
+free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain
+closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this
+repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers,
+firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..30c6a452
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="minimal-install">
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+    <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the
+Package Group Selection screen, see <xref
+linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
+their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
+workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package
+Selection, see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer
+you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f139ceb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Summary of miscellaneous parameters</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! -->
+<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots -->
+<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)-->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+      the drakxid-miscellaneous section -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph -->
+<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. -->
+<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" -->
+<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summary.png" width="800"
+align="center" format="PNG" depth="600" xml:id="summary-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want after pressing
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred
+language. You can change it if needed. See also <xref
+linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you
+correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>User management</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">You can add extra users here. They will each get their own
+<literal>/home</literal> directories and will not be able to look in your or
+each other's documents, mails, pictures and other files.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>Services</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run the background
+(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may
+prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para>
+
+        <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on
+your location, language or type of keyboard.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs
+etc.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the
+options selected will work with your computer.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">For more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"></xref>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png"
+align="center" width="800" format="PNG" depth="600"
+xml:id="summaryBottom-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>Network</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia
+Control Center</application>, after having enabled the non-free media
+repositories.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch
+that interface as well.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider
+internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a
+proxy service.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you
+need to enter here</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Security</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default
+setting (Standard) is adequate for general use.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Check the option which best suits your usage.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the
+rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your
+selections will depend on what you use your computer for.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..999db2b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+  version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+   
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 commented the empty paragraphs out-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+partition</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition.
+Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  
+   
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1980ffde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Security Level</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+ 
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">You can adjust your security level here.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
+in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0ad16e16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings,
+like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
+can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other
+Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list,
+after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the
+first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real
+choice.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an
+input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
+multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
+default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India
+Live-CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input
+method so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input
+methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be
+installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
+after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" -&gt;
+"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b974b129
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+      "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed  -->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectinstallClass.png" align="center"
+width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Install</para>
+
+      <para>Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Upgrade</para>
+
+      <para>If you have one or more previous installations of
+<application>Mageia</application> on your system, the installer will allow
+you to upgrade one of them to the latest release.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to
+reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been
+formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in
+the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an
+unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you
+want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the "Install or Upgrade" screen to the language choice
+screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do
+<emphasis>not</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cca7e57b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Keyboard</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable
+keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" depth="600"
+fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" width="800"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard
+layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the
+specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There
+may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also
+look here: <link
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on
+<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard
+there.</para>
+
+      <para revision="1"><warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog,
+you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though
+a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly
+and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the
+full list.</para>
+        </warning></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin
+and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8b4d3d2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+       code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+       up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Please choose a language to use</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your
+continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during
+the installation and for your installed system.</para>
+
+  <para>If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your
+system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the
+<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be
+difficult to add extra language support after installation.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"
+width="100%" format="PNG" depth="600"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them
+as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be
+marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen .</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then
+it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the
+"multiple languages" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your
+language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia
+Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..579e3ce1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" width="100%" depth="600"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a
+different one here.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB
+mice</guilabel> is a good choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to
+configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9fa259fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Bootloader main options</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+
+ 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata width="100%" revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" xml:id="setupBootloader-im1" format="PNG"
+depth="600"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by
+the installer, you can change them here.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case
+you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or
+allow Mageia to create a new one.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa3">The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Using a Mageia bootloader</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR
+(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other
+operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia
+boot menu.</para>
+
+    <para revision="3">Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB
+legacy and Lilo.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by
+GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is
+used.</para>
+
+      <para revision="3">The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at
+the Summary page during installation.</para>
+    </warning>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Using an existing bootloader</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember
+to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the
+bootloader install location.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Do not select a device e.g."sda", or you will overwrite your existing
+MBR. You must select the root partition that you chose during the
+partitioning phase earlier, e.g.  sda7.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where
+your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to
+the installer screen.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader
+is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve
+running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and
+add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in
+question.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Bootloader advanced option</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition
+that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp
+at each boot</guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2b59f034
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title></info>
+
+	
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" width="800" depth="600"
+format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  
+  
+  <para>You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the
+relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen
+and editing the screen that pops up on top of it.</para>
+
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png" width="800" depth="600"
+format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  <para>Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an
+entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one.</para>
+  <para>You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely.</para>
+  <para>The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a
+choice while booting up.</para>
+<warning><para>Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't
+just try something without knowing what you are doing.</para></warning>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c2b238c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+       Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+width="100%" depth="600" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers
+it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently
+fail to recognise the drive.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s)
+you have.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2ef634b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+    hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+    saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"
+align="center" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your
+choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every
+partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>